Monomethylvaline compounds having phenylalanine carboxy modifications at the C-terminus

ABSTRACT

Auristatin peptide analogs of MeVal-Val-Dil-Dap-Phe (MMAF) having a carboxylic acid equivalent at the C-terminal phenylalanine were prepared and attached to ligands through various linkers, including maleimidocaproyl-val-cit-PAB. The resulting ligand drug conjugates were active in vitro and in vivo.

This application is the national stage filing under 35 U.S.C. §371 of International Application No. PCT/US2006/026809 filed Jan. 7, 2006 and published Jan. 18, 2007 as International Publication No. WO 2007/008848 which in turn claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/697,728, filed Jul. 7, 2005; the disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention is directed to Drug Compounds, Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugates, Drug-Linker Compounds, and Drug-Ligand Conjugates, to compositions including the same, and to methods of using the same to treat cancer, autoimmune disease, infectious disease and other pathological conditions. The invention also relates to methods of using Antibody Drug Conjugate compounds in vitro, in situ, and in vivo for the diagnosis or treatment of mammalian cells, or associated pathological conditions.

REFERENCE TO A SEQUENCE LISTING

This application includes a sequence listing as a text file, named 1000-00711US ST25 created May 16, 2013.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

A great deal of interest has surrounded the use of monoclonal antibodies (mAbs) for the selective delivery of cytotoxic agents to tumor cells. MMAF (N-methylvaline-valine-dolaisoleuine-dolaproine-phenylalanine) is an auristatin that is relatively non-toxic, yet is highly potent in activity when conjugated to internalizing mAbs. MMAF has a charged C-terminal phenylalanine residue that attenuates its cytotoxic activity compared to its neutral counterpart, MMAE; this difference is most likely due to impaired intracellular access. However, conjugating MMAF to internalizing antibodies, like AC10 or 1F6, via a protease cleavable linker resulted in conjugates that are >2000 fold more potent on antigen positive cells as compared to unconjugated drug. Active targeting with mAbs facilitates intracellular delivery of MMAF; once MMAF is released from the conjugate inside cells the drug, it is presumably trapped due to its reduced ability to cross cellular membranes, thus increasing its intracellular concentration and therefore the potency of the conjugate. Using cytotoxic drugs with impaired passive intracellular uptake can potentially lead to mAb-drug conjugates with reduced systemic toxicity. Indeed, non-specific cleavage of the linker in circulation would release a relatively non-toxic drug.

To expand and improve the auristatin class of drugs, and the corresponding antibody drug conjugates (ADCs), the C-terminal phenylalanine residue of MMAF has been replaced with carboxylic acid equivalents, such as phosphonophenylalanine (pPhe). This structural modification imparts unexpected properties to the resultant free drug and ADC. The recitation of any reference in this application is not an admission that the reference is prior art to this application.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

In one aspect, the present invention provides a compound having the formula:

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts or solvates thereof, wherein, R² is selected from H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R³ is selected from H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); R⁴ is selected from H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); and R⁵ is selected from H and methyl. Alternatively, R⁴ and R⁵ jointly form a carbocyclic ring and have the formula —(CR^(a)R^(b))n- wherein R^(a) and R^(b) are independently selected from H, C₁-C₈ alkyl and C₃-C₈ carbocycle and n is selected from 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. The substituent R⁶ is selected from H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁷ is selected from H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, C₁-C₈ alkyl-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle). Each R⁸ substituent is independently selected from H, OH, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle and O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl); X¹ is an C₁₋₁₀ alkylene; and the moiety —NR⁹Z¹ is a phenylalanine bioisostere with a carboxy group replacement.

In another aspect, the present invention provides a compounds having the formula: L_(v)-[(LU)₀₋₁-(D)₁₋₄]_(p) wherein L is H or a Ligand unit; LU is a Linker unit (LU); v is 0 or 1; p is an integer from about 1 to about 20; and D is a drug moiety having the formula:

wherein the substitutents R²-R⁹, X¹ and Z¹ are as defined above; and pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.

The compounds of the above formulas are useful for treating disorders, such as cancer, autoimmune disease or infectious disease, in a patient or useful as an intermediate for the synthesis of a Drug-Linker Compound or a Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugate (e.g., a Drug-Linker-Antibody Conjugate, a Drug-Ligand Conjugate, or a Drug-Ligand Conjugate having a cleavable Drug unit).

In another aspect, compositions are provided that include an effective amount of a compound of the above formulas and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or vehicle.

In yet another aspect, methods for killing or inhibiting the multiplication of a tumor cell or cancer cell are provided. In still another aspect, methods for treating cancer are provided. In still another aspect, methods for killing or inhibiting the replication of a cell that expresses an autoimmune antibody are provided. In yet another aspect, methods for treating an autoimmune disease are provided. In still another aspect, methods for treating an infectious disease are provided. In yet another aspect, methods for preventing the multiplication of a tumor cell or cancer cell are provided. In still another aspect, methods for preventing cancer are provided. In still another aspect, methods for preventing the multiplication of a cell that expresses an autoimmune antibody are provided. In yet another aspect, methods for preventing an autoimmune disease are provided. In still another aspect, methods for preventing an infectious disease are provided.

In another aspect, a Drug Compound is provided that can be used as an intermediate for the synthesis of a Drug-Linker Compound having a cleavable Drug unit. In another aspect, a Drug-Linker Compound is provided that can be used as an intermediate for the synthesis of a Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugate.

In another aspect, an assay is provided for detecting cancer cells, the assay including:

-   (a) exposing the cells to an Antibody Drug Conjugate compound; and -   (b) determining the extent of binding of the Antibody Drug Conjugate     compound to the cells.

The invention will best be understood by reference to the following detailed description of the exemplary embodiments, taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, figures, and schemes. The discussion below is descriptive, illustrative and exemplary and is not to be taken as limiting the scope defined by any appended claims.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

NONE

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS

I. Definitions and Abbreviations

Unless stated otherwise, the following terms and phrases as used herein are intended to have the following meanings. When trade names are used herein, the trade name includes the product formulation, the generic drug, and the active pharmaceutical ingredient(s) of the trade name product, unless otherwise indicated by context.

The term “antibody” herein is used in the broadest sense and specifically covers intact monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, monospecific antibodies, multispecific antibodies (e.g., bispecific antibodies) formed from at least two intact antibodies, and antibody fragments, that exhibit the desired biological activity. An intact antibody has primarily two regions: a variable region and a constant region. The variable region binds to and interacts with a target antigen. The variable region includes a complementary determining region (CDR) that recognizes and binds to a specific binding site on a particular antigen. The constant region may be recognized by and interact with the immune system (see, e.g., Janeway et al., 2001, Immuno. Biology, 5th Ed., Garland Publishing, New York). An antibody can be of any type (e.g., IgG, IgE, IgM, IgD, and IgA), class (e.g., IgG1, IgG2, IgG3, IgG4, IgA1 and IgA2) or subclass. The antibody can be derived from any suitable species. In one aspect, however, the antibody is of human, murine, or rabbit origin. An antibody can be, for example, human, humanized or chimeric, a single chain antibody, an Fv fragment, an Fab fragment, an F(ab′) fragment, an F(ab′)₂ fragment(s), a fragment(s) produced by a Fab expression library, anti-idiotypic (anti-Id) antibodies, and epitope-binding fragments of any of the above which immunospecifically bind to a target antigen (e.g., a cancer cell antigen, a viral antigen or a microbial antigen).

The terms “specifically binds” and “specific binding” refer to antibody binding to a predetermined antigen. Typically, the antibody binds with an affinity of at least about 1×10⁷ M⁻¹, and binds to the predetermined antigen with an affinity that is at least two-fold greater than its affinity for binding to a non-specific antigen (e.g., BSA, casein) other than the predetermined antigen or a closely-related antigen.

The term “monoclonal antibody” as used herein refers to an antibody obtained from a population of substantially homogeneous antibodies, i.e., the individual antibodies comprising the population are identical except for possible naturally-occurring mutations that may be present in minor amounts. Monoclonal antibodies are highly specific, being directed against a single antigenic site. The modifier “monoclonal” indicates the character of the antibody as being obtained from a substantially homogeneous population of antibodies, and is not to be construed as requiring production of the antibody by any particular method.

The term “monoclonal antibodies” specifically include “chimeric” antibodies in which a portion of the heavy and/or light chain is identical with or homologous to corresponding sequences in antibodies derived from a particular species or belonging to a particular antibody class or subclass, while the remainder of the chain(s) is identical with or homologous to corresponding sequences in antibodies derived from another species or belonging to another antibody class or subclass, as well as fragments of such antibodies, so long as they exhibit the desired biological activity.

“Antibody fragments” comprise a portion of an intact antibody, preferably comprising the antigen-binding or variable region thereof. Examples of antibody fragments include Fab, Fab′, F(ab′)₂, and Fv fragments, diabodies, triabodies, tetrabodies, linear antibodies, single-chain antibody molecules, scFv, scFv-Fc, and multispecific antibodies formed from antibody fragment(s).

An “intact” antibody is one which comprises an antigen-binding variable region as well as a light chain constant domain (C_(L)) and heavy chain constant domains, C_(H)1, C_(H)2, C_(H)3 and C_(H)4, as appropriate for the antibody class. The constant domains may be native sequence constant domains (e.g., human native sequence constant domains) or amino acid sequence variant thereof.

An intact antibody may have one or more “effector functions” which refers to those biological activities attributable to the Fc region (e.g., a native sequence Fc region or amino acid sequence variant Fc region) of an antibody. Examples of antibody effector functions include C1q binding; complement dependent cytotoxicity; Fc receptor binding; antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity (ADCC); phagocytosis; down regulation of cell surface receptors (e.g., B cell receptor; BCR), etc.

A “native sequence” polypeptide is one which has the same amino acid sequence as a polypeptide, e.g., a tumor-associated antigen receptor, derived from nature. Such native sequence polypeptides can be isolated from nature or can be produced by recombinant or synthetic means. Thus, a native sequence polypeptide can have the amino acid sequence of a naturally-occurring human polypeptide, a murine polypeptide, or a polypeptide from any other mammalian species.

The term “amino acid sequence variant” refers to polypeptides having amino acid sequences that differ to some extent from a native sequence polypeptide. Ordinarily, amino acid sequence variants will possess at least about 70% homology with at least one receptor binding domain of a native ligand, or with at least one ligand binding domain of a native receptor, such as a tumor-associated antigen. In other aspects, they will be at least about 80%, at least about 90%, or at least 95% homologous with such receptor or ligand binding domains. The amino acid sequence variants possess substitutions, deletions, and/or insertions at certain positions within the amino acid sequence of the native amino acid sequence.

“Sequence identity” is defined as the percentage of residues in the amino acid sequence variant that are identical after aligning the sequences and introducing gaps, if necessary, to achieve the maximum percent sequence identity. A preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of two sequences is the algorithm of Karlin and Altschul, 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:2264-2268, modified as in Karlin and Altschul, 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5877. Such an algorithm is incorporated into the NBLAST and XBLAST programs of Altschul et al., 1990, J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410. BLAST nucleotide searches can be performed with the NBLAST program, score=100, wordlength=12, to obtain nucleotide sequences homologous to a nucleic acid encoding a protein of interest. BLAST protein searches can be performed with the XBLAST program, score=50, wordlength=3, to obtain amino acid sequences homologous to protein of interest. To obtain gapped alignments for comparison purposes, Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et al., 1997, Nucleic Acids Res. 25:3389-3402. Alternatively, PSI-Blast can be used to perform an iterated search which detects distant relationships between molecules (Id.). When utilizing BLAST, Gapped BLAST, and PSI-Blast programs, the default parameters of the respective programs (e.g., XBLAST and NBLAST) can be used. Another preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of sequences is the algorithm of Myers and Miller, CABIOS (1989). Such an algorithm is incorporated into the ALIGN program (version 2.0) which is part of the GCG sequence alignment software package. When utilizing the ALIGN program for comparing amino acid sequences, a PAM120 weight residue table, a gap length penalty of 12, and a gap penalty of 4 can be used. Additional algorithms for sequence analysis are known in the art and include ADVANCE and ADAM as described in Torellis and Robotti, 1994, Comput. Appl. Biosci. 10:3-5; and FASTA described in Pearson and Lipman, 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444-8. Within FASTA, ktup is a control option that sets the sensitivity and speed of the search. If ktup=2, similar regions in the two sequences being compared are found by looking at pairs of aligned residues; if ktup=1, single aligned amino acids are examined. ktup can be set to 2 or 1 for protein sequences, or from 1 to 6 for DNA sequences. The default if ktup is not specified is 2 for proteins and 6 for DNA. Alternatively, protein sequence alignment may be carried out using the CLUSTAL W algorithm, as described by Higgins et al., 1996, Methods Enzymol. 266:383-402. In some embodiments, the two sequences that are compared are the same length after gaps are introduced within the sequences, as appropriate (e.g., excluding additional sequence extending beyond the sequences being compared).

“Antibody-dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity” and “ADCC” refer to a cell-mediated reaction in which nonspecific cytotoxic cells that express Fc receptors (FcRs) (e.g., Natural Killer (NK) cells, neutrophils, and macrophages) recognize bound antibody on a target cell and subsequently cause lysis of the target cell. The primary cells for mediating ADCC, NK cells, express FcγRIII only, whereas monocytes express FcγRI, FcγRII and FcγRIII. FcR expression on hematopoietic cells in summarized is Table 3 on page 464 of Ravetch and Kinet, 1991, Annu. Rev. Immunol. 9:457-92. To assess ADCC activity of a molecule of interest, an in vitro ADCC assay, such as that described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,500,362 or 5,821,337 may be performed. Useful effector cells for such assays include peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMC) and Natural Killer (NK) cells. Alternatively, or additionally, ADCC activity of the molecule of interest may be assessed in vivo, e.g., in a animal model such as that disclosed in Clynes et al., 1998, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 95:652-656.

The terms “Fc receptor” or “FcR” are used to describe a receptor that binds to the Fc region of an antibody. The preferred FcR is a native sequence human FcR. Moreover, a preferred FcR is one which binds an IgG antibody (a gamma receptor) and includes receptors of the FcγRI, FcγRII, and FcγRIII subclasses, including allelic variants and alternatively spliced forms of these receptors. FcγRII receptors include FcγRIIA (an “activating receptor”) and FcγRIIB (an “inhibiting receptor”), that have similar amino acid sequences that differ primarily in the cytoplasmic domains thereof. Activating receptor FcγRIIA contains an immunoreceptor tyrosine-based activation motif (ITAM) in its cytoplasmic domain. Inhibiting receptor FcγRIIB contains an immunoreceptor tyrosine-based inhibition motif (ITIM) in its cytoplasmic domain. (See review M. in Daëron, 1997, Annu. Rev. Immunol. 15:203-234). FcRs are reviewed in Ravetch and Kinet, 1991, Annu. Rev. Immunol., 9:457-92; Capel et al., 1994, Immunomethods 4:25-34 (1994); and de Haas et al, 1995, J. Lab. Clin. Med. 126:330-41. Other FcRs, including those to be identified in the future, are encompassed by the term “FcR” herein. The term also includes the neonatal receptor, FcRn, which is responsible for the transfer of maternal IgGs to the fetus. (See, e.g., Guyer et al., 1976, J. Immunol. 117:587; and Kim et al., 1994, J. Immunol. 24:249).

“Complement dependent cytotoxicity” or “CDC” refers to the ability of a molecule to lyse a target in the presence of complement. The complement activation pathway is initiated by the binding of the first component of the complement system (C1q) to a molecule (e.g., an antibody) complexed with a cognate antigen. To assess complement activation, a CDC assay, e.g., as described in Gazzano-Santoro et al., 1996, J. Immunol. Methods 202:163, may be performed.

The term “variable” refers to certain portions of the variable domains of antibodies that differ extensively in sequence and are used in the binding and specificity of each particular antibody for its particular antigen. This variability is concentrated in three segments called “hypervariable regions” in the light chain and the heavy chain variable domains. The more highly conserved portions of variable domains are called the framework regions (FRs). The variable domains of native heavy and light chains each comprise four FRs connected by three hypervariable regions.

The term “hypervariable region” when used herein refers to the amino acid residues of an antibody which are responsible for antigen-binding. The hypervariable region generally comprises amino acid residues from a “complementarity determining region” or “CDR” (e.g., residues 24-34 (L1), 50-56 (L2) and 89-97 (L3) in the light chain variable domain and 31-35 (H1), 50-65 (H2) and 95-102 (H3) in the heavy chain variable domain; Kabat et al. (Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest, 5th Ed. Public Health Service, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Md. (1991)) and/or those residues from a “hypervariable loop” (e.g., residues 26-32 (L1), 50-52 (L2) and 91-96 (L3) in the light chain variable domain and 26-32 (H1), 53-55 (H2) and 96-101 (H3) in the heavy chain variable domain; Chothia and Lesk, 1987, J. Mol. Biol. 196:901-917). “Framework Region” or “FR” residues are those variable domain residues other than the hypervariable region residues as herein defined.

“Single-chain Fv” or “scFv” antibody fragments comprise the V_(H) and V_(L) domains of antibody, wherein these domains are present in a single polypeptide chain. Typically, the Fv polypeptide further comprises a polypeptide linker between the V_(H) and V_(L) domains which enables the scFv to form the desired structure for antigen binding. For a review of scFv, see Plückthun in The Pharmacology of Monoclonal Antibodies, vol. 113, Rosenburg and Moore eds., Springer-Verlag, New York, pp. 269-315 (1994).

The term “diabodies” refers to small antibody fragments with two antigen-binding sites, which fragments comprise a variable heavy domain (V_(H)) connected to a variable light domain (V_(L)) in the same polypeptide chain. By using a linker that is too short to allow pairing between the two domains on the same chain, the domains are forced to pair with the complementary domains of another chain and create two antigen-binding sites. Diabodies are described more fully in, for example, EP 0 404 097; WO 93/11161; and Hollinger et al., 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:6444-6448.

“Humanized” forms of non-human (e.g., rodent) antibodies are chimeric antibodies that contain minimal sequence derived from non-human immunoglobulin. For the most part, humanized antibodies are human immunoglobulins (recipient antibody) in which residues from a hypervariable region of the recipient are replaced by residues from a hypervariable region of a non-human species (donor antibody) such as mouse, rat, rabbit or nonhuman primate having the desired specificity, affinity, and capacity. In some instances, framework region (FR) residues of the human immunoglobulin are replaced by corresponding non-human residues. Furthermore, humanized antibodies may comprise residues that are not found in the recipient antibody or in the donor antibody. These modifications are made to further refine antibody performance. In general, the humanized antibody will comprise substantially all of at least one, and typically two, variable domains, in which all or substantially all of the hypervariable loops correspond to those of a non-human immunoglobulin and all or substantially all of the FRs are those of a human immunoglobulin sequence. The humanized antibody optionally also will comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin constant region (Fc), typically that of a human immunoglobulin. For further details, see Jones et al., 1986, Nature 321:522-525; Riechmann et al., 1988, Nature 332:323-329; and Presta, 1992, Curr. Op. Struct. Biol. 2:593-596.

As used herein, “isolated” means separated from other components of (a) a natural source, such as a plant or animal cell or cell culture, or (b) a synthetic organic chemical reaction mixture. As used herein, “purified” means that when isolated, the isolate contains at least 95%, and in another aspect at least 98%, of a compound (e.g., a conjugate) by weight of the isolate.

An “isolated” antibody is one which has been identified and separated and/or recovered from a component of its natural environment. Contaminant components of its natural environment are materials which would interfere with diagnostic or therapeutic uses for the antibody, and may include enzymes, hormones, and other proteinaceous or nonproteinaceous solutes. In preferred embodiments, the antibody will be purified (1) to greater than 95% by weight of antibody as determined by the Lowry method, and most preferably more than 99% by weight, (2) to a degree sufficient to obtain at least 15 residues of N-terminal or internal amino acid sequence by use of a spinning cup sequenator, or (3) to homogeneity by SDS-PAGE under reducing or nonreducing conditions using Coomassie blue or, preferably, silver stain. Isolated antibody includes the antibody in situ within recombinant cells since at least one component of the antibody's natural environment will not be present. Ordinarily, however, isolated antibody will be prepared by at least one purification step.

An antibody “which binds” an antigen of interest is one capable of binding that antigen with sufficient affinity such that the antibody is useful in targeting a cell expressing the antigen.

An antibody which “induces apoptosis” is one which induces programmed cell death as determined by binding of annexin V, fragmentation of DNA, cell shrinkage, dilation of endoplasmic reticulum, cell fragmentation, and/or formation of membrane vesicles (called apoptotic bodies). The cell is a tumor cell, e.g., a breast, ovarian, stomach, endometrial, salivary gland, lung, kidney, colon, thyroid, pancreatic or bladder cell. Various methods are available for evaluating the cellular events associated with apoptosis. For example, phosphatidyl serine (PS) translocation can be measured by annexin binding; DNA fragmentation can be evaluated through DNA laddering; and nuclear/chromatin condensation along with DNA fragmentation can be evaluated by any increase in hypodiploid cells.

The term “therapeutically effective amount” refers to an amount of a drug effective to treat a disease or disorder in a mammal. In the case of cancer, the therapeutically effective amount of the drug may reduce the number of cancer cells; reduce the tumor size; inhibit (i.e., slow to some extent and preferably stop) cancer cell infiltration into peripheral organs; inhibit (i.e., slow to some extent and preferably stop) tumor metastasis; inhibit, to some extent, tumor growth; and/or relieve to some extent one or more of the symptoms associated with the cancer. To the extent the drug may prevent growth and/or kill existing cancer cells, it may be cytostatic and/or cytotoxic. For cancer therapy, efficacy can, for example, be measured by assessing the time to disease progression (TTP) and/or determining the response rate (RR).

The term “substantial amount” refers to a majority, i.e. >50% of a population, of a collection or a sample.

The term “intracellular metabolite” refers to a compound resulting from a metabolic process or reaction inside a cell on a Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugate (e.g., an antibody drug conjugate (ADC)). The metabolic process or reaction may be an enzymatic process such as proteolytic cleavage of a peptide linker of the ADC, by hydrolysis of a functional group such as a hydrazone, ester, or amide, or by proteolytic degradation of the Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugate (e.g., releasing a cystyl-Linker-Drug fragment). Intracellular metabolites include, but are not limited to, antibodies and free drug which have undergone intracellular cleavage after entry, diffusion, uptake or transport into a cell.

The terms “intracellularly cleaved” and “intracellular cleavage” refer to a metabolic process or reaction inside a cell on an Drug-Ligand Conjugate, a Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugate, an Antibody Drug Conjugate (ADC) or the like, whereby the covalent attachment, e.g., the linker, between the drug moiety (D) and the antibody (Ab) is broken, resulting in the free Drug, a Drug-Linker Compound or other metabolite of the Conjugate dissociated from the antibody inside the cell. The cleaved moieties of the Drug-Ligand Conjugate, a Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugate or ADC are thus intracellular metabolites.

The term “bioavailability” refers to the systemic availability (i.e., blood/plasma levels) of a given amount of drug administered to a patient. Bioavailability is an absolute term that indicates measurement of both the time (rate) and total amount (extent) of drug that reaches the general circulation from an administered dosage form.

The term “cytotoxic activity” refers to a cell-killing, cytostatic or anti-proliferation effect of an antibody drug conjugate compound or an intracellular metabolite of an antibody drug conjugate compound. Cytotoxic activity may be expressed as the IC₅₀ value which is the concentration (molar or mass) per unit volume at which half the cells survive.

A “disorder” is any condition that would benefit from treatment. This includes chronic and acute disorders or diseases including those pathological conditions which predispose the mammal to the disorder in question. Non-limiting examples of disorders to be treated herein include benign and malignant tumors; leukemia and lymphoid malignancies, in particular breast, ovarian, stomach, endometrial, salivary gland, lung, kidney, colon, thyroid, pancreatic, prostate or bladder cancer; neuronal, glial, astrocytal, hypothalamic and other glandular, macrophagal, epithelial, stromal and blastocoelic disorders; and inflammatory, angiogenic and immunologic disorders.

The terms “cancer” and “cancerous” refer to or describe the physiological condition or disorder in mammals that is typically characterized by unregulated cell growth. A “tumor” comprises one or more cancerous cells. Examples of cancer include, but are not limited to, carcinoma, lymphoma, blastoma, sarcoma, and leukemia or lymphoid malignancies. More particular examples of such cancers include squamous cell cancer (e.g., epithelial squamous cell cancer), lung cancer including small-cell lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer (“NSCLC”), adenocarcinoma of the lung and squamous carcinoma of the lung, cancer of the peritoneum, hepatocellular cancer, gastric or stomach cancer including gastrointestinal cancer, pancreatic cancer, glioblastoma, cervical cancer, ovarian cancer, liver cancer, bladder cancer, hepatoma, breast cancer, colon cancer, rectal cancer, colorectal cancer, endometrial or uterine carcinoma, salivary gland carcinoma, kidney or renal cancer, prostate cancer, vulval cancer, thyroid cancer, hepatic carcinoma, anal carcinoma, penile carcinoma, as well as head and neck cancer.

The term “cytotoxic agent” as used herein refers to a substance that inhibits or prevents the function of cells and/or causes destruction of cells. The term is intended to include radioactive isotopes (e.g., ²¹¹At, ¹³¹I, ¹²⁵I, ⁹⁰Y, ¹⁸⁶Re, ¹⁸⁸Re, ¹⁵³Sm, ²¹²Bi, ³²P, ⁶⁰C, and radioactive isotopes of Lu), chemotherapeutic agents, and toxins such as small molecule toxins or enzymatically active toxins of bacterial, fungal, plant or animal origin, including synthetic analogs and derivatives thereof. In one aspect, the term does not include a radioactive isotope(s).

The term “cytokine” is a generic term for proteins released by one cell population which act on another cell as intercellular mediators. Examples of such cytokines are lymphokines, monokines, and traditional polypeptide hormones. Included among the cytokines are growth hormone such as human growth hormone, N-methionyl human growth hormone, and bovine growth hormone; parathyroid hormone; thyroxine; insulin; proinsulin; relaxin; prorelaxin; glycoprotein hormones such as follicle stimulating hormone (FSH), thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), and luteinizing hormone (LH); hepatic growth factor; fibroblast growth factor; prolactin; placental lactogen; tumor necrosis factor-α and -β; mullerian-inhibiting substance; mouse gonadotropin-associated peptide; inhibin; activin; vascular endothelial growth factor; integrin; thrombopoietin (TPO); nerve growth factors such as NGF-β; platelet-growth factor; transforming growth factors (TGFs) such as TGF-α and TGF-β; insulin-like growth factor-I and -II; erythropoietin (EPO); osteoinductive factors; interferons such as interferon-α, -β, and -γ; colony stimulating factors (CSFS) such as macrophage-CSF (M-CSF); granulocyte-macrophage-CSF (GM-CSF); and granulocyte-CSF (G-CSF); interleukins (ILs) such as IL-1, IL-1α, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-11, and IL-12; a tumor necrosis factor such as TNF-α or TNF-β; and other polypeptide factors including LIF and kit ligand (KL). As used herein, the term cytokine includes proteins from natural sources or from recombinant cell culture and biologically active equivalents of the native sequence cytokines.

The term “prodrug” as used in this application refers to a precursor or derivative form of a pharmaceutically active substance that is less cytotoxic to tumor cells compared to the parent drug and is capable of being enzymatically or hydrolytically activated or converted into the more active parent form. See, e.g., Wilman, “Prodrugs in Cancer Chemotherapy” Biochemical Society Transactions, 14, pp. 375-382, 615th Meeting Belfast (1986) and Stella et al., “Prodrugs: A Chemical Approach to Targeted Drug Delivery,” Directed Drug Delivery, Borchardt et al., (ed.), pp. 247-267, Humana Press (1985). The prodrugs of this invention include, but are not limited to, phosphate-containing prodrugs, thiophosphate-containing prodrugs, sulfate-containing prodrugs, peptide-containing prodrugs, D-amino acid-modified prodrugs, glycosylated pro drugs, β-lactam-containing prodrugs, optionally substituted phenoxyacetamide-containing prodrugs or optionally substituted phenylacetamide-containing prodrugs, 5-fluorocytosine and other 5-fluorouridine prodrugs which can be converted into the more active cytotoxic free drug. Examples of cytotoxic drugs that can be derivatized into a prodrug form for use in this invention include, but are not limited to, those chemotherapeutic agents described above.

A “liposome” is a small vesicle composed of various types of lipids, phospholipids and/or surfactant which is useful for delivery of a drug (such as, for example, anti-CD20, CD30, CD33, CD40, CD70, BCMA, or Lewis Y antibodies and, optionally, a chemotherapeutic agent) to a mammal. The components of the liposome are commonly arranged in a bilayer formation, similar to the lipid arrangement of biological membranes.

The term “package insert” is used to refer to instructions customarily included in commercial packages of therapeutic products, that contain information about the indication(s), usage, dosage, administration, contraindications and/or warnings concerning the use of such therapeutic products.

An “isolated” nucleic acid molecule is a nucleic acid molecule that is identified and separated from at least one contaminant nucleic acid molecule with which it is ordinarily associated in the natural source of the nucleic acid. An isolated nucleic acid molecule is other than in the form or setting in which it is found in nature. Isolated nucleic acid molecules therefore are distinguished from the nucleic acid molecule as it exists in natural cells. However, an isolated nucleic acid molecule includes a nucleic acid molecule contained in cells that ordinarily express the nucleic acid where, for example, the nucleic acid molecule is in a chromosomal location different from that of natural cells.

The expression “control sequences” refers to DNA sequences necessary for the expression of an operably linked coding sequence in a particular host organism. The control sequences that are suitable for prokaryotes, for example, include a promoter, optionally an operator sequence, and a ribosome binding site. Eukaryotic cells are known to utilize promoters, polyadenylation signals, and enhancers.

A nucleic acid is “operably linked” when it is placed into a functional relationship with another nucleic acid sequence. For example, DNA for a presequence or secretory leader is operably linked to DNA encoding a polypeptide if it is expressed as a preprotein that participates in the secretion of the polypeptide; a promoter or enhancer is operably linked to a coding sequence, for example, if it affects the transcription of the sequence; or a ribosome binding site is operably linked to a coding sequence if it is positioned so as to facilitate translation. Generally, “operably linked” means that the DNA sequences being linked are contiguous, and, in the case of a secretory leader, contiguous and in reading phase. However, enhancers do not have to be contiguous. Linking can be accomplished by ligation at convenient restriction sites. If such sites do not exist, the synthetic oligonucleotide adaptors or linkers can be used in accordance with conventional practice.

As used herein, the expressions “cell,” “cell line,” and “cell culture” are used interchangeably and all such designations include progeny. Thus, the words “transformants” and “transformed cells” include the primary subject cell and cultures derived therefrom without regard for the number of transfers. It is also understood that all progeny may not be precisely identical in DNA content, due to deliberate or inadvertent mutations. Mutant progeny that have the same function or biological activity as screened for in the originally transformed cell are included. Where distinct designations are intended, it will be clear from the context.

An “autoimmune disease” herein is a disease or disorder arising from and directed against an individual's own tissues or a co-segregate or manifestation thereof or resulting condition therefrom. Examples of autoimmune diseases or disorders include, but are not limited to arthritis (rheumatoid arthritis, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, psoriatic arthritis, and ankylosing spondylitis), psoriasis, dermatitis including atopic dermatitis; chronic idiopathic urticaria, including chronic autoimmune urticaria, polymyositis/dermatomyositis, toxic epidermal necrolysis, systemic scleroderma and sclerosis, responses associated with inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) (Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis), and IBD with co-segregate of pyoderma gangrenosum, erythema nodosum, primary sclerosing cholangitis, and/or episcleritis), respiratory distress syndrome, including adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), meningitis, IgE-mediated diseases such as anaphylaxis and allergic rhinitis, encephalitis such as Rasmussen's encephalitis, uveitis, colitis such as microscopic colitis and collagenous colitis, glomerulonephritis (GN) such as membranous GN, idiopathic membranous GN, membranous proliferative GN (MPGN), including Type I and Type II, and rapidly progressive GN, allergic conditions, eczema, asthma, conditions involving infiltration of T cells and chronic inflammatory responses, atherosclerosis, autoimmune myocarditis, leukocyte adhesion deficiency, systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE) such as cutaneous SLE, lupus (including nephritis, cerebritis, pediatric, non-renal, discoid, alopecia), juvenile onset diabetes, multiple sclerosis (MS) such as spino-optical MS, allergic encephalomyelitis, immune responses associated with acute and delayed hypersensitivity mediated by cytokines and T-lymphocytes, tuberculosis, sarcoidosis, granulomatosis including Wegener's granulomatosis, agranulocytosis, vasculitis (including Large Vessel vasculitis (including Polymyalgia Rheumatica and Giant Cell (Takayasu's) Arteritis), Medium Vessel vasculitis (including Kawasaki's Disease and Polyarteritis Nodosa), CNS vasculitis, and ANCA-associated vasculitis, such as Churg-Strauss vasculitis or syndrome (CSS)), aplastic anemia, Coombs positive anemia, Diamond Blackfan anemia, immune hemolytic anemia including autoimmune hemolytic anemia (AIHA), pernicious anemia, pure red cell aplasia (PRCA), Factor VIII deficiency, hemophilia A, autoimmune neutropenia, pancytopenia, leukopenia, diseases involving leukocyte diapedesis, CNS inflammatory disorders, multiple organ injury syndrome, myasthenia gravis, antigen-antibody complex mediated diseases, anti-glomerular basement membrane disease, anti-phospholipid antibody syndrome, allergic neuritis, Bechet disease, Castleman's syndrome, Goodpasture's Syndrome, Lambert-Eaton Myasthenic Syndrome, Reynaud's syndrome, Sjorgen's syndrome, Stevens-Johnson syndrome, solid organ transplant rejection (including pretreatment for high panel reactive antibody titers, IgA deposit in tissues, and rejection arising from renal transplantation, liver transplantation, intestinal transplantation, cardiac transplantation, etc.), graft versus host disease (GVHD), pemphigoid bullous, pemphigus (including vulgaris, foliaceus, and pemphigus mucus-membrane pemphigoid), autoimmune polyendocrinopathies, Reiter's disease, stiff-man syndrome, immune complex nephritis, IgM polyneuropathies or IgM mediated neuropathy, idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura (ITP), thrombotic throbocytopenic purpura (TTP), thrombocytopenia (as developed by myocardial infarction patients, for example), including autoimmune thrombocytopenia, autoimmune disease of the testis and ovary including autoimmune orchitis and oophoritis, primary hypothyroidism; autoimmune endocrine diseases including autoimmune thyroiditis, chronic thyroiditis (Hashimoto's Thyroiditis), subacute thyroiditis, idiopathic hypothyroidism, Addison's disease, Grave's disease, autoimmune polyglandular syndromes (or polyglandular endocrinopathy syndromes), Type I diabetes also referred to as insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (IDDM), including pediatric IDDM, and Sheehan's syndrome; autoimmune hepatitis, Lymphoid interstitial pneumonitis (HIV), bronchiolitis obliterans (non-transplant) vs NSIP, Guillain-Barré Syndrome, Berger's Disease (IgA nephropathy), primary biliary cirrhosis, celiac sprue (gluten enteropathy), refractory sprue with co-segregate dermatitis herpetiformis, cryoglobulinemia, amylotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS; Lou Gehrig's disease), coronary artery disease, autoimmune inner ear disease (AIED), autoimmune hearing loss, opsoclonus myoclonus syndrome (OMS), polychondritis such as refractory polychondritis, pulmonary alveolar proteinosis, amyloidosis, giant cell hepatitis, scleritis, monoclonal gammopathy of uncertain/unknown significance (MGUS), peripheral neuropathy, paraneoplastic syndrome, channelopathies such as epilepsy, migraine, arrhythmia, muscular disorders, deafness, blindness, periodic paralysis, and channelopathies of the CNS; autism, inflammatory myopathy, and focal segmental glomerulosclerosis (FSGS).

The term “alkyl” refers to a straight chain or branched, saturated or unsaturated hydrocarbon having the indicated number of carbon atoms (e.g., “C₁-C₈ alkyl” refers to an alkyl group having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms). When the number of carbon atoms is not indicated, the alkyl group has from 1 to 8 carbon atoms. Representative straight chain “C₁-C₈ alkyl” groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, n-butyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl and n-octyl; while branched C₁-C₈ alkyls include, but are not limited to, -isopropyl, -sec-butyl, -isobutyl, -tert-butyl, -isopentyl, and 2-methylbutyl; unsaturated C₂-C₈ alkyls include, but are not limited to, -vinyl, -allyl, -1-butenyl, -2-butenyl, -isobutylenyl, -1-pentenyl, -2-pentenyl, -3-methyl-1-butenyl, -2-methyl-2-butenyl, -2,3-dimethyl-2-butenyl, 1-hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl, -acetylenyl, -propynyl, -1-butynyl, -2-butynyl, -1-pentynyl, -2-pentynyl and -3-methyl-1 butynyl. An alkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), aryl, —C(O)R′, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)OR′, —C(O)NH₂, —C(O)NHR′, —C(O)N(R′)₂—NHC(O)R′, —SO₃R′, —S(O)₂R′, —S(O)R′, —OH, -halogen, —N₃, —NH₂, —NH(R′), —N(R′)₂, —SR′ and —CN; where each R′ is independently selected from H, unsubstituted C₁-C₈ alkyl and aryl.

“Alkenyl” refers to a C₂-C₁₈ hydrocarbon containing normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic carbon atoms with at least one site of unsaturation, i.e. a carbon-carbon, sp² double bond. Examples include, but are not limited to: ethylene or vinyl (—CH═CH₂), allyl (—CH₂CH═CH₂), cyclopentenyl (—C₅H₇), and 5-hexenyl (—CH₂ CH₂CH₂CH₂CH═CH₂).

“Alkynyl” refers to a C₂-C₁₈ hydrocarbon containing normal, secondary, tertiary or cyclic carbon atoms with at least one site of unsaturation, i.e. a carbon-carbon, sp triple bond. Examples include, but are not limited to: acetylenic (—C≡CH) and propargyl (—CH₂C≡CH).

“Alkylene” refers to a saturated, branched or straight chain or cyclic hydrocarbon radical of 1-18 carbon atoms, and having two monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of two hydrogen atoms from the same or two different carbon atoms of a parent alkane. Typical alkylene radicals include, but are not limited to: methylene (—CH₂—), 1,2-ethyl (—CH₂CH₂—), 1,3-propyl (—CH₂CH₂CH₂—), 1,4-butyl (—CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂—), and the like. A “C₁-C₁₀ alkylene” is a straight chain, saturated hydrocarbon group of the formula —(CH₂)₁₋₁₀—. Examples of a C₁-C₁₀ alkylene include methylene, ethylene, propylene, butylene, pentylene, hexylene, heptylene, ocytylene, nonylene and decalene.

“Alkenylene” refers to an unsaturated, branched or straight chain or cyclic hydrocarbon radical of 2-18 carbon atoms, and having two monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of two hydrogen atoms from the same or two different carbon atoms of a parent alkene. Typical alkenylene radicals include, but are not limited to: 1,2-ethylene (—CH═CH—).

“Alkynylene” refers to an unsaturated, branched or straight chain or cyclic hydrocarbon radical of 2-18 carbon atoms, and having two monovalent radical centers derived by the removal of two hydrogen atoms from the same or two different carbon atoms of a parent alkyne. Typical alkynylene radicals include, but are not limited to: acetylene (—C≡C—), propargyl (—CH₂C≡C—), and 4-pentynyl (—CH₂CH₂CH₂C≡CH—).

“Aryl” means a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon radical of 6-20 carbon atoms derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent aromatic ring system. Some aryl groups are represented in the exemplary structures as “Ar”. Typical aryl groups include, but are not limited to, radicals derived from benzene, substituted benzene, naphthalene, anthracene, biphenyl, and the like. Other examples of aryl groups include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl and anthracenyl. A carbocyclic aromatic group or a heterocyclic aromatic group can be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), —C(O)R′, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)OR′, —C(O)NH₂, —C(O)NHR′, —C(O)N(R′)₂—NHC(O)R′, —S(O)₂R′, —S(O)R′, —OH, -halogen, —N₃, —NH₂, —NH(R′), —N(R′)₂ and —CN; wherein each R′ is independently selected from H, —C₁-C₈ alkyl and unsubstituted aryl.

“Arylalkyl” refers to an acyclic alkyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp³ carbon atom, is replaced with an aryl radical. Typical arylalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, benzyl, 2-phenylethan-1-yl, 2-phenylethen-1-yl, naphthylmethyl, 2-naphthylethan-1-yl, 2-naphthylethen-1-yl, naphthobenzyl, 2-naphthophenylethan-1-yl, and the like. The arylalkyl group comprises 6 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkyl moiety, including alkanyl, alkenyl or alkynyl groups, of the arylalkyl group is 1 to 6 carbon atoms and the aryl moiety is 6 to 14 carbon atoms.

“Heteroarylalkyl” refers to an acyclic alkyl radical in which one of the hydrogen atoms bonded to a carbon atom, typically a terminal or sp³ carbon atom, is replaced with a heteroaryl radical. Typical heteroarylalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, 2-benzimidazolylmethyl, 2-furylethyl, and the like. The heteroarylalkyl group comprises 6 to 20 carbon atoms, e.g., the alkyl moiety, including alkanyl, alkenyl or alkynyl groups, of the heteroarylalkyl group is 1 to 6 carbon atoms and the heteroaryl moiety is 5 to 14 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, and S. The heteroaryl moiety of the heteroarylalkyl group may be a monocycle having 3 to 7 ring members (2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, and S) or a bicycle having 7 to 10 ring members (4 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, and S), for example: a bicyclo [4,5], [5,5], [5,6], or [6,6] system.

“Substituted alkyl”, “substituted aryl”, and “substituted arylalkyl” mean alkyl, aryl, and arylalkyl respectively, in which one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently replaced with a substituent. Typical substituents include, but are not limited to, —X, —R, —O⁻, —OR, —SR, —S⁻, —NR₂, —NR₃, ═NR, —CX₃, —CN, —OCN, —SCN, —N═C═O, —NCS, —NO, —NO₂, ═N₂, —N₃, NC(═O)R, —C(═O)R, —C(═O)NR₂, —SO₃ ⁻, —SO₃H, —S(═O)₂R, —OS(═O)₂OR, —S(═O)₂NR, —S(═O)R, —OP(═O)(OR)₂, —P(═O)(OR)₂, —PO⁻ ₃, —PO₃H₂, —AsO₂H₂, —C(═O)R, —C(═O)X, —C(═S)R, —CO₂R, —CO₂ ⁻, —C(═S)OR, —C(═O)SR, —C(═S)SR, —C(═O)NR₂, —C(═S)NR₂, or —C(═NR)NR₂, where each X is independently a halogen: F, Cl, Br, or I; and each R is independently —H, C₁-C₂₀ alkyl, C₆-C₂₀ aryl, C₃-C₁₄ heterocycle, a protecting group or a prodrug moiety. Alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene groups as described above may also be similarly substituted.

“Heteroaryl” and “heterocycle” refer to a ring system in which one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom, e.g., nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. The heterocycle radical comprises 1 to 20 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, and S. A heterocycle may be a monocycle having 3 to 7 ring members (2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, and S) or a bicycle having 7 to 10 ring members (4 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, P, and S), for example: a bicyclo [4,5], [5,5], [5,6], or [6,6] system.

Heterocycles are described in Paquette, Leo A.; “Principles of Modern Heterocyclic Chemistry” (W. A. Benjamin, New York, 1968), particularly Chapters 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 9; “The Chemistry of Heterocyclic Compounds, A series of Monographs” (John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1950 to present), in particular Volumes 13, 14, 16, 19, and 28; and J. Am. Chem. Soc. (1960) 82:5566.

Examples of heterocycles include by way of example and not limitation pyridyl, dihydroypyridyl, tetrahydropyridyl (piperidyl), thiazolyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, sulfur oxidized tetrahydrothiophenyl, pyrimidinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl, benzofuranyl, thianaphthalenyl, indolyl, indolenyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, piperidinyl, 4-piperidonyl, pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidonyl, pyrrolinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, bis-tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, bis-tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, octahydroisoquinolinyl, azocinyl, triazinyl, 6H-1,2,5-thiadiazinyl, 2H,6H-1,5,2-dithiazinyl, thienyl, thianthrenyl, pyranyl, isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl, phenoxathinyl, 2H-pyrrolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, 1H-indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, plithalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl, carbazolyl, β-carbolinyl, phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, pyrimidinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl, phenoxazinyl, isochromanyl, chromanyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, piperazinyl, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, quinuclidinyl, morpholinyl, oxazolidinyl, benzotriazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, oxindolyl, benzoxazolinyl, and isatinoyl.

By way of example and not limitation, carbon bonded heterocycles are bonded at position 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 of a pyridine, position 3, 4, 5, or 6 of a pyridazine, position 2, 4, 5, or 6 of a pyrimidine, position 2, 3, 5, or 6 of a pyrazine, position 2, 3, 4, or 5 of a furan, tetrahydrofuran, thiofuran, thiophene, pyrrole or tetrahydropyrrole, position 2, 4, or 5 of an oxazole, imidazole or thiazole, position 3, 4, or 5 of an isoxazole, pyrazole, or isothiazole, position 2 or 3 of an aziridine, position 2, 3, or 4 of an azetidine, position 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 of a quinoline or position 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 of an isoquinoline. Still more typically, carbon bonded heterocycles include 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 5-pyridyl, 6-pyridyl, 3-pyridazinyl, 4-pyridazinyl, 5-pyridazinyl, 6-pyridazinyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 4-pyrimidinyl, 5-pyrimidinyl, 6-pyrimidinyl, 2-pyrazinyl, 3-pyrazinyl, 5-pyrazinyl, 6-pyrazinyl, 2-thiazolyl, 4-thiazolyl, or 5-thiazolyl.

By way of example and not limitation, nitrogen bonded heterocycles are bonded at position 1 of an aziridine, azetidine, pyrrole, pyrrolidine, 2-pyrroline, 3-pyrroline, imidazole, imidazolidine, 2-imidazoline, 3-imidazoline, pyrazole, pyrazoline, 2-pyrazoline, 3-pyrazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indole, indoline, 1H-indazole, position 2 of a isoindole, or isoindoline, position 4 of a morpholine, and position 9 of a carbazole, or β-carboline. Still more typically, nitrogen bonded heterocycles include 1-aziridyl, 1-azetedyl, 1-pyrrolyl, 1-imidazolyl, 1-pyrazolyl, and 1-piperidinyl.

A “C₃-C₈ heterocycle” refers to an aromatic or non-aromatic C₃-C₈ carbocycle in which one to four of the ring carbon atoms are independently replaced with a heteroatom from the group consisting of O, S and N. Representative examples of a C₃-C₈ heterocycle include, but are not limited to, benzofuranyl, benzothiophene, indolyl, benzopyrazolyl, coumarinyl, isoquinolinyl, pyrrolyl, thiophenyl, furanyl, thiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, quinolinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridinyl, pyridonyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl and tetrazolyl. A C₃-C₈ heterocycle can be unsubstituted or substituted with up to seven groups including, but not limited to, —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -aryl, —C(O)R′, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)OR′, —C(O)NH₂, —C(O)NHR′, —C(O)N(R′)₂, —NHC(O)R′, —S(O)₂R′, —S(O)R′, —OH, -halogen, —N₃, —NH₂, —NH(R′), —N(R′)₂ and —CN; wherein each R′ is independently selected from H, —C₁-C₈ alkyl and aryl. “C₃-C₈ heterocyclo” refers to a C₃-C₈ heterocycle group defined above wherein one of the heterocycle group's hydrogen atoms is replaced with a bond. A C₃-C₈ heterocyclo can be unsubstituted or substituted with up to six groups including, but not limited to, —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -aryl, —C(O)R′, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)OR′, —C(O)NH₂, —C(O)NHR′, —C(O)N(R′)₂—NHC(O)R′, —S(O)₂R′, —S(O)R′, —OH, -halogen, —N₃, —NH₂, —NH(R′), —N(R′)₂ and —CN; wherein each R′ is independently selected from H, —C₁-C₈ alkyl and aryl.

“Carbocycle” means a saturated or unsaturated ring having 3 to 7 carbon atoms as a monocycle or 7 to 12 carbon atoms as a bicycle. Monocyclic carbocycles have 3 to 6 ring atoms, still more typically 5 or 6 ring atoms. Bicyclic carbocycles have 7 to 12 ring atoms, e.g., arranged as a bicyclo [4,5], [5,5], [5,6] or [6,6] system, or 9 or 10 ring atoms arranged as a bicyclo [5,6] or [6,6] system. Examples of monocyclic carbocycles include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, 1-cyclopent-1-enyl, 1-cyclopent-2-enyl, 1-cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclohexyl, 1-cyclohex-1-enyl, 1-cyclohex-2-enyl, 1-cyclohex-3-enyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl. A “C₃-C₈ carbocycle” is a 3-, 4-, 5-, 6-, 7- or 8-membered saturated or unsaturated non-aromatic carbocyclic ring. Representative C₃-C₈ carbocycles include, but are not limited to, -cyclopropyl, -cyclobutyl, -cyclopentyl, -cyclopentadienyl, -cyclohexyl, -cyclohexenyl, -1,3-cyclohexadienyl, -1,4-cyclohexadienyl, -cycloheptyl, -1,3-cycloheptadienyl, -1,3,5-cycloheptatrienyl, -cyclooctyl, and -cyclooctadienyl. A C₃-C₈ carbocycle group can be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more groups including, but not limited to, —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -aryl, —C(O)R′, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)OR′, —C(O)NH₂, —C(O)NHR′, —C(O)N(R′)₂, —NHC(O)R′, —S(O)₂R′, —S(O)R′, —OH, -halogen, —N₃, —NH₂, —NH(R′), —N(R′)₂ and —CN; where each R′ is independently selected from H, —C₁-C₈ alkyl and aryl. A “C₃-C₈ carbocyclo” refers to a C₃-C₈ carbocycle group defined above wherein one of the carbocycle groups' hydrogen atoms is replaced with a bond.

An “arylene” is an aryl group which has two covalent bonds and can be in the ortho, meta, or para configurations as shown in the following structures:

in which the phenyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted with up to four groups including, but not limited to, —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -aryl, —C(O)R′, —OC(O)R′, —C(O)OR′, —C(O)NH2, —C(O)NHR′, —C(O)N(R′)2, —NHC(O)R′, —S(O)2R′, —S(O)R′, —OH, -halogen, —N3, —NH2, —NH(R′), —N(R′)2 and —CN; wherein each R′ is independently selected from H, —C1-C8 alkyl and aryl.

The term “chiral” refers to molecules which have the property of non-superimposability of the mirror image partner, while the term “achiral” refers to molecules which are superimposable on their mirror image partner.

The term “stereoisomers” refers to compounds which have identical chemical constitution, but differ with regard to the arrangement of the atoms or groups in space.

“Diastereomer” refers to a stereoisomer with two or more centers of chirality and whose molecules are not mirror images of one another. Diastereomers have different physical properties, e.g., melting points, boiling points, spectral properties, and reactivities. Mixtures of diastereomers may separate under high resolution analytical procedures such as electrophoresis and chromatography.

Stereochemical definitions and conventions used herein generally follow S. P. Parker, Ed., McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Chemical Terms, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York (1984); and Eliel and Wilen, Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York (1994). Many organic compounds exist in optically active forms, i.e., they have the ability to rotate the plane of plane-polarized light. In describing an optically active compound, the prefixes D and L, or R and S, are used to denote the absolute configuration of the molecule about its chiral center(s). The prefixes d and 1 or (+) and (−) are employed to designate the sign of rotation of plane-polarized light by the compound, with (−) or 1 meaning that the compound is levorotatory. A compound prefixed with (+) or d is dextrorotatory. For a given chemical structure, these stereoisomers are identical except that they are mirror images of one another. A specific stereoisomer may also be referred to as an enantiomer, and a mixture of such isomers is often called an enantiomeric mixture. A 50:50 mixture of enantiomers is referred to as a racemic mixture or a racemate, which may occur where there has been no stereoselection or stereospecificity in a chemical reaction or process. The terms “racemic mixture” and “racemate” refer to an equimolar mixture of two enantiomeric species, devoid of optical activity.

Examples of a “hydroxyl protecting group” include, but are not limited to, methoxymethyl ether, 2-methoxyethoxymethyl ether, tetrahydropyranyl ether, benzyl ether, p-methoxybenzyl ether, trimethylsilyl ether, triethylsilyl ether, triisopropyl silyl ether, t-butyldimethyl silyl ether, triphenylmethyl silyl ether, acetate ester, substituted acetate esters, pivaloate, benzoate, methanesulfonate and p-toluenesulfonate.

“Leaving group” refers to a functional group that can be substituted by another functional group. Such leaving groups are well known in the art, and examples include, but are not limited to, a halide (e.g., chloride, bromide, iodide), methanesulfonyl (mesyl), p-toluenesulfonyl (tosyl), trifluoromethylsulfonyl (triflate), and trifluoromethylsulfonate.

Examples of a “patient” include, but are not limited to, a human, rat, mouse, guinea pig, monkey, pig, goat, cow, horse, dog, cat, bird and fowl. In an exemplary embodiment, the patient is a human.

The phrase “pharmaceutically acceptable salt,” as used herein, refers to pharmaceutically acceptable organic or inorganic salts of a compound (e.g., a Drug, Drug-Linker compound, or a Drug-Linker-Ligand compound). The compound typically contains at least one amino group, and accordingly acid addition salts can be formed with this amino group. Exemplary salts include, but are not limited to, sulfate, citrate, acetate, oxalate, chloride, bromide, iodide, nitrate, bisulfate, phosphate, acid phosphate, isonicotinate, lactate, salicylate, acid citrate, tartrate, oleate, tannate, pantothenate, bitartrate, ascorbate, succinate, maleate, gentisinate, fumarate, gluconate, glucuronate, saccharate, formate, benzoate, glutamate, methanesulfonate, ethanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate, and pamoate (i.e., 1,1′-methylene-bis-(2-hydroxy-3-naphthoate)) salts. A pharmaceutically acceptable salt may involve the inclusion of another molecule such as an acetate ion, a succinate ion or other counterion. The counterion may be any organic or inorganic moiety that stabilizes the charge on the parent compound. Furthermore, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt may have more than one charged atom in its structure. Instances where multiple charged atoms are part of the pharmaceutically acceptable salt can have multiple counter ions. Hence, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt can have one or more charged atoms and/or one or more counterion.

“Pharmaceutically acceptable solvate” or “solvate” refer to an association of one or more solvent molecules and a compound of the invention, e.g., an Exemplary Compound or Exemplary Conjugate. Examples of solvents that form pharmaceutically acceptable solvates include, but are not limited to, water, isopropanol, ethanol, methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid, and ethanolamine.

The following abbreviations are used herein and have the indicated definitions: AE is auristatin E, Boc is N-(t-butoxycarbonyl), cit is citrulline, dap is dolaproine, DCC is 1,3-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, DCM is dichloromethane, DEA is diethylamine, DEAD is diethylazodicarboxylate, DEPC is diethylphosphorylcyanidate, DIAD is diisopropylazodicarboxylate, DIEA is N,N-diisopropylethylamine, dil is dolaisoleuine, DMAP is 4-dimethylaminopyridine, DME is ethyleneglycol dimethyl ether (or 1,2-dimethoxyethane), DMF is N,N-dimethylformamide, DMSO is dimethylsulfoxide, doe is dolaphenine, dov is N,N-dimethylvaline, DTNB is 5,5′-dithiobis(2-nitrobenzoic acid), DTPA is diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid, DTT is dithiothreitol, EDCI is 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride, EEDQ is 2-ethoxy-1-ethoxycarbonyl-1,2-dihydroquinoline, ES-MS is electrospray mass spectrometry, EtOAc is ethyl acetate, Fmoc is N-(9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl), gly is glycine, HATU is O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate, HOBt is 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, HPLC is high pressure liquid chromatography, ile is isoleucine, lys is lysine, MeCN(CH₃CN) is acetonitrile, MeOH is methanol, Mtr is 4-anisyldiphenylmethyl (or 4-methoxytrityl), or is (1S,2R)-(+)-norephedrine, PAB is p-aminobenzyl, PBS is phosphate-buffered saline (pH 7.4), PEG is polyethylene glycol, Ph is phenyl, Pnp is p-nitrophenyl, MC is 6-maleimidocaproyl, phe is L-phenylalanine, PyBrop is bromo tris-pyrrolidino phosphonium hexafluorophosphate, SEC is size-exclusion chromatography, Su is succinimide, TBTU is O-benzotriazol-1-yl-N,N,N,N-tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate, TFA is trifluoroacetic acid, TLC is thin layer chromatography, UV is ultraviolet, and val is valine.

The following linker abbreviations are used herein and have the indicated definitions: Val Cit or vc is a valine-citrulline, dipeptide site in protease cleavable linker; PAB is p-aminobenzylcarbamoyl; (Me)vc is N-methyl-valine citrulline, where the linker peptide bond has been modified to prevent its cleavage by cathepsin B; MC(PEG)₆-OH is maleimidocaproyl-polyethylene glycol; SPP is N-Succinimidyl 4-(2-pyridylthio) pentanoate; and SMCC is N-Succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)cyclohexane-1 carboxylate.

The terms “treat” or “treatment,” unless otherwise indicated by context, refer to both therapeutic treatment and prophylactic or preventative measures, wherein the object is to prevent or slow down (lessen) an undesired physiological change or disorder, such as the development or spread of cancer. For purposes of this invention, beneficial or desired clinical results include, but are not limited to, alleviation of symptoms, diminishment of extent of disease, stabilized (i.e., not worsening) state of disease, delay or slowing of disease progression, amelioration or palliation of the disease state, and remission (whether partial or total), whether detectable or undetectable. “Treatment” can also mean prolonging survival as compared to expected survival if not receiving treatment. Those in need of treatment include those already with the condition or disorder as well as those prone to have the condition or disorder or those in which the condition or disorder is to be prevented.

In the context of cancer, the term “treating” includes any or all of: preventing growth of tumor cells, cancer cells, or of a tumor; preventing replication of tumor cells or cancer cells, lessening of overall tumor burden or decreasing the number of cancerous cells, and ameliorating one or more symptoms associated with the disease.

In the context of an autoimmune disease, the term “treating” includes any or all of: preventing replication of cells associated with an autoimmune disease state including, but not limited to, cells that produce an autoimmune antibody, lessening the autoimmune-antibody burden and ameliorating one or more symptoms of an autoimmune disease.

In the context of an infectious disease, the term “treating” includes any or all of: preventing the growth, multiplication or replication of the pathogen that causes the infectious disease and ameliorating one or more symptoms of an infectious disease.

The following cytotoxic drug abbreviations are used herein and have the indicated definitions: “MMAF” is N-methylvaline-valine-dolaisoleuine-dolaproine-phenylalanine (MW 731.5); “MMAZ” is N-methylvaline-valine-dolaisoleuine-dolaproine with a phenylalanine analog at the C-terminus. Z is —NR9Z1.

II. Embodiments of the Invention

A. Compounds and Conjugates

As noted in the Summary of the Invention, the present invention is drawn to a series of compounds (D) and conjugates containing a drug compound (D). The drug compounds are useful as discrete entities, or can be conjugated to Ligands (L, in some embodiments, antibodies), either directly or through a Linker Unit (LU). The Linker Unit can operate to provide a suitable release of D or spacing between D and L. Additionally, some Linker Units can have multiple attached drugs (e.g., one to four attached drugs can be represented as -LU-(D)₁₋₄).

In one group of embodiments, the invention provides compounds having Formula I: L-(D)_(p)  (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein, L- is a Ligand unit; p is an integer from about 1 to about 20; and D is a drug moiety having Formula D:

wherein, the substituent R² is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R³ is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); R⁴ is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); R⁵ is selected from the group consisting of H and methyl. Alternatively, R⁴ and R⁵ jointly form a carbocyclic ring and have the formula —(CR^(a)R^(b))_(n)—, wherein R^(a) and R^(b) are independently selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl and C₃-C₈ carbocycle and n is selected from the group consisting of 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. The substituent R⁶ is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁷ is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle). Each R⁸ is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle and O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl); each X¹ is independently C₁-C₁₀ alkylene; and the moiety —NR⁹Z¹ is a phenylalanine bioisostere with a carboxy group replacement.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety has the Formula A

wherein the substituent R⁹ is selected from the group consisting of H and an amino protecting group; R¹⁰ is selected from the group consisting of C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₁-C₈heteroalkyl, CH₂—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), CH₂-aryl group and CH₂—C₃-C₈ heterocycle; and the carboxy group replacement, Z², is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein when present in the Z² substituent of Formula A, each R²⁰ is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, halo C₁-C₈ alkyl, aryl, X¹-aryl, OR²¹, SR²¹, N(R²¹)₂, —NHCOR²¹ and —NHSO₂R²¹; each R²¹ is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, CN, CO₂—C₁₋₈-alkyl, C₁-C₈ alkyl, haloC₁-C₈ alkyl, C₁-C₈ alkoxy, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—N(R²²)₂, X¹—O₂C—C₁-C₈ alkyl, X¹—O₂C-aryl, and X¹—CO₂—R²⁶; each R²² is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, aryl and SO₂R²⁶ or an amino acid moiety when combined with the N to which it is attached; the subscript y is an integer of from 1 to 4; Z³ is selected from the group consisting of O, S and NR²²; R²³ is selected from the group consisting of —NR²²OR²¹, —ON(R²¹)₂, —OR²⁴, —NR²²R²⁴ and —N(R²⁴)₂; R²⁴ is selected from the group consisting of X¹-aryl, X¹—O₂C—R²⁰, X¹—CO₂R²⁶, X¹—OR²¹, X¹—N(R²²) and COR²⁰; R²⁶ is independently H or C₁-C₂₀ alkyl; and each X¹ is independently C₁-C₁₀ alkylene.

In one embodiment, R⁹ is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₂₀ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocyclyl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈-carbocyclyl) and X¹—C₃-C₈-heterocyclyl. In another embodiment R⁹ is C₁-C₈alkyl or benzyl. In another embodiment R⁹ is H.

In one embodiment, R¹⁰ is benzyl.

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²⁰ and R²¹ are as set forth above.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein each R²⁰ is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, haloC₁-C₈ alkyl, aryl, X¹-aryl, OR²¹, SR²¹, N(R²¹)₂, —NHCOR²¹ and —NHSO₂R²¹; each R²¹ is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, CN, CO₂—C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₁-C₈ alkyl, haloC₁-C₈ alkyl, C₁-C₈ alkoxy, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—N(R²²)₂, X¹—O₂C—C₁-C₈ alkyl, X¹—O₂C-aryl and X¹—CO₂—R²⁶; each R²² is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, aryl and SO₂R²⁶ or an amino acid moiety when combined with the N to which it is attached; R²⁶ is independently H or C₁-C₂₀ alkyl; R²⁷ is an amino acid side chain; and each X¹ is independently C₁-C₁₀ alkylene.

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²⁰, R²¹ and R²² are as set forth above.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

wherein R²⁰, R²¹ and R²² are as set forth above.

In one embodiment of formula A, Z² is

wherein R²⁰ is selected from the group consisting of C₁-C₈ alkyl and OR²¹; R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

wherein R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²⁰ is H.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²⁰ and R²² are as set forth above.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

wherein R²⁰ and R²² are as set forth above

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²⁰ is as set forth above.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²⁰ and R²² are as set forth above.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

wherein R²⁰ and R²² are as set forth above.

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²⁰ and y are as set forth above.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

wherein R²⁰ and R²² are as set forth above.

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²¹ and y are as set forth above.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

wherein R²¹ and y are as set forth above.

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²³ is selected from the group consisting of —NR²²OR²¹, —ON(R²¹)₂, —OR²⁴, —NR²²R²⁴ and —N(R²⁴)₂; R²⁴ is selected from the group consisting of X¹-aryl, X¹—O₂C—R²⁰, X¹—CO₂R²⁶, X¹—OR²¹, X¹—N(R²²) and COR²⁰; R²⁶ is independently H or C₁-C₂₀ alkyl; each X¹ is independently C₁-C₁₀ alkylene; and each aryl is optionally substituted with As(OH)₂.

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²³ is selected from the group consisting of —NR²²OR²¹, —ON(R²¹)₂, —OR²⁴, —NR²²R²⁴ and —N(R²⁴)₂; R²⁴ is selected from the group consisting of X¹-aryl, X¹—O₂C—R²⁰, X¹—CO₂R²⁶, X¹—OR²¹, X¹—N(R²²) and COR²⁰; R²⁰ is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, halo C₁-C₈ alkyl, aryl, X¹-aryl, OR²¹, SR²¹, N(R²¹)₂, —NHCOR²¹ and —NHSO₂R²¹; R²¹ is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, CN, CO₂—X¹-alkyl, C₁-C₈ alkyl, haloC₁-C₈ alkyl, C₁-C₈ alkoxy, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—N(R²²)₂, X¹—O₂C—C₁-C₈ alkyl, X¹—O₂C-aryl, and X¹—CO₂—R²⁶; R²² is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, aryl and SO₂R²⁶ or an amino acid moiety when combined with the N to which it is attached; and R²⁶ is independently H or C₁-C₂₀ alkyl.

In one embodiment the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is selected from the group consisting of:

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein each R²⁰ is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, haloC₁-C₈ alkyl, aryl, X¹-aryl, OR²¹, SR²¹, N(R²¹)₂, —NHCOR²¹ and —NHSO₂R²¹;

-   each R²¹ is independently selected from the group consisting of H,     OH, CN, CO₂—C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₁-C₈ alkyl, haloC₁-C₈ alkyl, C₁-C₈ alkoxy,     aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—N(R²²)₂; X¹—O₂C—C₁-C₈ alkyl, X¹—O₂C-aryl and     X¹—CO₂—R²⁶; -   each R²² is independently selected from the group consisting of H,     C₁-C₈ alkyl, aryl and SO₂R²⁶ or an amino acid moiety when combined     with the N to which it is attached; and -   each R²⁶ is independently H or C₁-C₂₀ alkyl.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

wherein R²⁰ is as set forth above.

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein each R²⁰ is selected from the group consisting of H, haloC₁-C₈alkyl and OR²¹; and R²¹ is H or C₁-C₈alkyl.

In one embodiment the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

wherein each R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

wherein R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment for formula A, Z² is

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

wherein R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

wherein R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

wherein R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

wherein R²¹ is H.

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

In one embodiment of Formula A, Z² is

In one embodiment, the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety of Formula A is

In a related aspect, the present invention provide for conjugates in which the compounds further comprise a Linker unit (LU), the compound having the formula L-(LU-(D)₁₋₄)_(p); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein L- is a Ligand unit; -LU- is a Linker unit; and -D is a Drug Unit, as set forth herein.

In another related aspect, the present invention provides for conjugates having the formula LU-(D)₁₋₄; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein, -LU- is a Linker unit; and -D is a drug moiety having the Formula D:

according to any of the above embodiments.

In one embodiment, Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugates are provided that have Formula Ia: L-(A_(a)-W_(w)-Y_(y)-D)_(p)  Ia or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof, wherein, L- is a Ligand unit; -A_(a)-W_(w)-Y_(y)- is a Linker unit (LU), wherein -A- is a Stretcher unit, a is 0 or 1; each -W- is independently an Amino Acid unit, w is an integer ranging from 0 to 12; -Y- is a Spacer unit, and y is 0, 1 or 2; p is an integer from about 1 to about 20; and -D is a Drug unit having Formulas D:

wherein, R² is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R³ is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); R⁴ is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); R⁵ is selected from the group consisting of H and methyl. Alternatively, R⁴ and R⁵ jointly form a carbocyclic ring and have the formula —(CR^(a)R^(b))_(n)—, wherein R^(a) and R^(b) are independently selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl and C₃-C₈ carbocycle and n is selected from the group consisting of 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. The substituent R⁶ is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁷ is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle): each R⁸ is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle and O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl); each X¹ is independently C₁-C₁₀ alkylene; and the moiety —NR⁹Z¹ is a phenylalanine bioisostere of any of the above embodiments.

Another aspect of the invention are Drug Compounds having the Formula Ib. These drug compounds are those described above, wherein the wavy line is replaced by a hydrogen atom. Specifially, the compounds are represented below:

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts or solvates thereof, wherein, R² is selected from H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R³ is selected from H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); R⁴ is selected from H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); R⁵ is selected from H and methyl. Alternatively, R⁴ and R⁵ jointly form a carbocyclic ring and have the formula —(CR^(a)R^(b))_(n)—, wherein R^(a) and R^(b) are independently selected from H, C₁-C₈ alkyl and C₃-C₈ carbocycle and n is selected from 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. The substituent R⁶ is selected from H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁷ is selected from H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); each R⁸ is independently selected from H, OH, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle and O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl); each X¹ is independently C₁-C₁₀ alkylene; and the moiety —NR⁹Z¹ is a phenylalanine bioisostere of any of the above embodiments.

In one embodiment, R³, R⁴ and R⁷ are independently isopropyl or sec-butyl and

R⁵ is —H. In an exemplary embodiment, R³ and R⁴ are each isopropyl, R⁵ is —H, and R⁷ is sec-butyl.

In another embodiment, R² and R⁶ are each methyl, and R⁹ is —H.

In still another embodiment, each occurrence of R⁸ is —OCH₃.

In an exemplary embodiment, R³ and R⁴ are each isopropyl, R² and R⁶ are each methyl, R⁵ is —H, R⁷ is sec-butyl, each occurrence of R⁸ is —OCH₃, and R⁹ is —H.

Illustrative Compounds of Formula (Ib), each of which may be used as drug moieties (D) in an ADC, include compounds having the following structures:

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts or solvates thereof.

In yet another embodiment, Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugates having the Formula Ia′ are provided: Ab-(A_(a)-W_(w)-Y_(y)-(D)_(d))_(p)  Ia′ or pharmaceutically acceptable salts or solvates thereof, wherein Ab is an antibody, A is a Stretcher unit, a is 0 or 1, each W is independently an Amino Acid unit, w is an integer ranging from 0 to 12, Y is a Spacer unit, and y is 0, 1 or 2, p is an integer from about 1 to about 20, d is an integer from 1-4; and D is a Drug moiety of Formula D:

wherein, R² is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R³ is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, C₁-C₈ alkyl-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); R⁴ is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); R⁵ is selected from the group consisting of H and methyl. Alternatively, R⁴ and R⁵ jointly form a carbocyclic ring and have the formula —(CR^(a)R^(b))_(n)—, wherein R^(a) and R^(b) are independently selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl and C₃-C₈ carbocycle and n is selected from the group consisting of 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. The substituent R⁶ is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁷ is selected from the group consisting of H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); each R⁸ is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle and O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl); each X¹ is independently C₁-C₁₀ alkylene; and the moiety —NR⁹Z¹ is a phenylalanine bioisostere of any of the above embodiments.

The antibody Ab can be any antibody covalently attached, directly or indirectly, to one or more drug units. In some embodiments, Ab can be an antibody that binds to CD20, CD30, CD33, CD40, CD70, BCMA, or Lewis Y antigen.

In one embodiment -W_(w)- is -Val-Cit-.

In another embodiment, R³, R⁴ and R⁷ are independently isopropyl or sec-butyl and R⁵ is —H. In an exemplary embodiment, R³ and R⁴ are each isopropyl, R⁵ is —H, and R⁷ is sec-butyl. In yet another embodiment, R² and R⁶ are each methyl, and R⁹ is —H.

In still another embodiment, each occurrence of R⁸ is —OCH₃.

In an exemplary embodiment, R³ and R⁴ are each isopropyl, R² and R⁶ are each methyl, R⁵ is —H, R⁷ is sec-butyl, each occurrence of R⁸ is —OCH₃, and R⁹ is —H.

In one aspect, the antibody Ab is chimeric AC10, chimeric BR96, chimeric S2C6, chimeric 1F6, chimeric 2F2, humanized AC10, humanized BR96, humanized S2C6, humanized 1F6, M195, humanized M195 or humanized 2F2.

Exemplary embodiments of Formula Ia have the following structures:

wherein Z is NR⁹Z¹.

In another aspect, Antibody Drug Conjugate compounds (ADCs) having Formula Ic are provided: Ab-(A_(a)-W_(w)-Y_(y)-D)_(p)  Ic comprising an antibody covalently attached to one or more drug units (moieties). A, a, W, w, Y and y are as described above. Such Antibody Drug Conjugate compounds include pharmaceutically acceptable salts or solvates thereof.

The drug loading is represented by p, the average number of drug molecules (D) per ligand (e.g., antibody) in Formula I, Ia, Ia′ or Ic. Drug loading may range from 1 to 20 Drug Units (D) per Ligand unit (L) (e.g., Ab or mAb). The Drug Unit may be conjugated directly or indirectly to the Ligand unit (e.g., via a Linker unit). Compositions of Formula Ia and Formula Ia′ include collections of antibodies conjugated with a range of drugs, from 1 to 20.

In some embodiments, p is from about 1 to about 8 Drug Units per Ligand unit. In some embodiments, p is from about 2 to about 8 Drug Units per Ligand unit. In some embodiments, p is from about 2 to about 6, or 2 to about 4 Drug Units per Ligand unit. In some embodiments, p is about 2, about 4, about 6 or about 8 Drug Units per Ligand unit.

The average number of Drug Units per Ligand unit in preparation of conjugation reactions may be characterized by conventional means such as mass spectroscopy, ELISA assay, and HPLC. The quantitative distribution of Ligand-Drug-Conjugates in terms of p may also be determined. In some instances, separation, purification, and characterization of homogeneous Ligand-Drug-conjugates where p is a certain value from Ligand-Drug-Conjugates with other drug loadings may be achieved by means such as reverse phase HPLC or electrophoresis.

For some antibody drug conjugates, p may be limited by the number of attachment sites on the antibody. For example, where the attachment is a cysteine thiol, as in the exemplary embodiments above, an antibody may have only one or several cysteine thiol groups, or may have only one or several sufficiently reactive thiol groups through which a linker may be attached.

Typically, fewer than the theoretical maximum of drug moieties are conjugated to an antibody during a conjugation reaction. An antibody may contain, for example, many lysine residues that do not react with the drug-linker intermediate or linker reagent. Only the most reactive lysine groups may react with an amine-reactive linker reagent. Generally, antibodies do not contain many, if any, free and reactive cysteine thiol groups which may be linked to a drug moiety. Most cysteine thiol residues in antibodies exist as disulfide bridges and must be reduced with a reducing agent, such as dithiothreitol (DTT). Additionally, the antibody must be subjected to denaturing conditions to reveal reactive nucleophilic groups such as lysine or cysteine. The loading (drug/antibody ratio) of an ADC may be controlled in several different manners, including: (i) limiting the molar excess of drug-linker intermediate or linker reagent relative to antibody, (ii) limiting the conjugation reaction time or temperature, and (iii) partial or limiting reductive conditions for cysteine thiol modification.

Where more than one nucleophilic group reacts with a drug-linker intermediate, or linker reagent followed by drug moiety reagent, then the resulting product is a mixture of ADC compounds with a distribution of one or more drug moieties attached to an antibody. The average number of drugs per antibody may be calculated from the mixture by dual ELISA antibody assay, specific for antibody and specific for the drug. Individual ADC molecules may be identified in the mixture by mass spectroscopy, and separated by HPLC, e.g., hydrophobic interaction chromatography (“Effect of drug loading on the pharmacology, pharmacokinetics, and toxicity of an anti-CD30 Antibody Drug Conjugate”, Hamblett, K. J., et al, Abstract No. 624, American Association for Cancer Research; Hamblett et al., 2004, Cancer Research 10:7063; 2004 Annual Meeting, Mar. 27-31, 2004, Proceedings of the AACR, Volume 45, March 2004; “Controlling the Location of Drug Attachment in Antibody Drug Conjugates”, Alley, S. C., et al, Abstract No. 627, American Association for Cancer Research; 2004 Annual Meeting, Mar. 27-31, 2004, Proceedings of the AACR, Volume 45, March 2004). Thus, a homogeneous ADC with a single loading value may be isolated from the conjugation mixture by electrophoresis or chromatography.

1. The Linker Unit

A “Linker unit” (LU) is a bifunctional compound which can be used to link a Drug unit and a Ligand unit to form Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugates, or which are useful in the formation of immunoconjugates directed against tumor associated antigens. Such immunoconjugates allow the selective delivery of toxic drugs to tumor cells.

In one embodiment, the Linker unit of the Drug-Linker Compound and Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugate has the formula: -A_(a)-W_(w)-Y_(y)- wherein, -A- is a Stretcher unit; a is 0 or 1; each -W- is independently an Amino Acid unit; w is independently an integer ranging from 0 to 12; -Y- is a Spacer unit; and y is 0, 1 or 2.

In the Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugate, the Linker is capable of linking the Drug moiety and the Ligand unit.

2. The Stretcher Unit

The Stretcher unit (-A-), when present, is capable of linking a Ligand unit to an amino acid unit (-W-). In this regard a Ligand (L) has a functional group that can form a bond with a functional group of a Stretcher. Useful functional groups that can be present on a Ligand unit, either naturally or via chemical manipulation include, but are not limited to, sulfhydryl (—SH), amino, hydroxyl, carboxy, the anomeric hydroxyl group of a carbohydrate, and carboxyl. In one aspect, the Ligand functional groups are sulfhydryl and amino. Sulfhydryl groups can be generated by reduction of an intramolecular or intermolecular disulfide bond of a Ligand. Alternatively, sulfhydryl groups can be generated by reaction of an amino group of a lysine moiety of a Ligand using 2-iminothiolane (Traut's reagent) or another sulfhydryl generating reagent.

In one embodiment, the Stretcher unit forms a bond with a sulfur atom of the Ligand unit. The sulfur atom can be derived from a sulfhydryl group of a Ligand. Representative Stretcher units of this embodiment are depicted within the square brackets of Formulas IIIa and IIIb, wherein L-, -W-, -Y-, -D, w and y are as defined above, and R¹⁷ is selected from —C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-, —C₃-C₈ carbocyclo-, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkylene)-, -arylene-, —C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-arylene-, -arylene-C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-, —C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-(C₃-C₈ carbocyclo)-, —(C₃-C₈ carbocyclo)-C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-, —C₃-C₈ heterocyclo-, —C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-(C₃-C₈ heterocyclo)-, —(C₃-C₈ heterocyclo)-C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-, —(CH₂CH₂O)_(r)— and —(CH₂CH₂O)_(r)—CH₂—; and r is an integer ranging from 1-10. It is to be understood from all the exemplary embodiments of Formula Ia, such as shown in Formulae III-VI, that even where not denoted expressly, from 1 to 20 drug moieties are linked to a Ligand (p=1-20).

An illustrative Stretcher unit is that of Formula IIIa wherein R¹⁷ is —(CH₂)₅—:

Another illustrative Stretcher unit is that of Formula IIIa wherein R¹⁷ is —(CH₂CH₂O)_(r)—CH₂—; and r is 2:

Still another illustrative Stretcher unit is that of Formula IIIb wherein R¹⁷ is —(CH₂)₅—:

In another embodiment, the Stretcher unit is linked to the Ligand unit via a disulfide bond between a sulfur atom of the Ligand unit and a sulfur atom of the Stretcher unit. A representative Stretcher unit of this embodiment is depicted within the square brackets of Formula IV, wherein R¹⁷, L-, -W-, -Y-, -D, w and y are as defined above. L-[S—R¹⁷—C(O)-W_(w)-Y_(y)-D]_(p)  IV

In yet another embodiment, the reactive group of the Stretcher contains a reactive site that can form a bond with a primary or secondary amino group of a Ligand. Example of these reactive sites include, but are not limited to, activated esters such as succinimide esters, 4-nitrophenyl esters, pentafluorophenyl esters, tetrafluorophenyl esters, anhydrides, acid chlorides, sulfonyl chlorides, isocyanates and isothiocyanates. Representative Stretcher units of this embodiment are depicted within the square brackets of Formulas Va-Vc, wherein —R¹⁷—, L-, -W-, -Y-, -D, w and y are as defined above; L-[C(O)NH—R¹⁷—C(O)-W_(w)-Y_(y)-D]_(p)  Va L-[C(S)NH—R¹⁷—C(O)-W_(w)-Y_(y)-D]_(p)  Vb L-[C(O)—R¹⁷—C(O)-W_(w)-Y_(y)-D]_(p)  Vc

In yet another aspect, the reactive group of the Stretcher contains a reactive site that is reactive to a modified carbohydrate's (—CHO) group that can be present on a Ligand. For example, a carbohydrate can be mildly oxidized using a reagent such as sodium periodate and the resulting (—CHO) unit of the oxidized carbohydrate can be condensed with a Stretcher that contains a functionality such as a hydrazide, an oxime, a primary or secondary amine, a hydrazine, a thiosemicarbazone, a hydrazine carboxylate, and an arylhydrazide such as those described by Kaneko et al., 1991, Bioconjugate Chem. 2:133-41. Representative Stretcher units of this embodiment are depicted within the square brackets of Formulas VIa, VIb, and VIc, wherein —R¹⁷—, L-, -W-, -Y-, -D, w and y are as defined above. L=[N—NH—R¹⁷—C(O)-W_(w)-Y_(y)-D]_(p)  VIa L=[N—O—R¹⁷—C(O)-W_(w)-Y_(y)-D]_(p)  VIb L=[N—NH—C(O)—R¹⁷—C(O)-W_(w)-Y_(y)-D]_(p)  VIc

3. The Amino Acid Unit

The Amino Acid unit (-W-), when present, links the Stretcher unit to the Spacer unit if the Spacer unit is present, links the Stretcher unit to the Drug moiety if the Spacer unit is absent, and links the Ligand unit to the Drug unit if the Stretcher unit and Spacer unit are absent.

W_(w)- is a dipeptide, tripeptide, tetrapeptide, pentapeptide, hexapeptide, heptapeptide, octapeptide, nonapeptide, decapeptide, undecapeptide or dodecapeptide unit. Each -W- unit independently has the formula denoted below in the square brackets, and w is an integer ranging from 0 to 12:

wherein R¹⁹⁰ is hydrogen, methyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, benzyl, p-hydroxybenzyl, —CH₂OH, —CH(OH)CH₃, —CH₂CH₂SCH₃, —CH₂CONH₂, —CH₂COOH, —CH₂CH₂CONH₂, —CH₂CH₂COOH, —(CH₂)₃NHC(═NH)NH₂, —(CH₂)₃NH₂, —(CH₂)₃NHCOCH₃, —(CH₂)₃NHCHO, —(CH₂)₄NHC(═NH)NH₂, —(CH₂)₄NH₂, —(CH₂)₄NHCOCH₃, —(CH₂)₄NHCHO, —(CH₂)₃NHCONH₂, —(CH₂)₄NHCONH₂, —CH₂CH₂CH(OH)CH₂NH₂, 2-pyridylmethyl-, 3-pyridylmethyl-, 4-pyridylmethyl-, phenyl, cyclohexyl,

The Amino Acid unit can be enzymatically cleaved by one or more enzymes, including a tumor-associated protease, to liberate the Drug unit (-D), which in one embodiment is protonated in vivo upon release to provide a Drug (D).

Illustrative W_(w) units are represented by formulas (VII)-(IX):

wherein R²⁰⁰ and R²⁰¹ are as follows:

R²⁰⁰ R²⁰¹ benzyl (CH₂)₄NH₂; methyl (CH₂)₄NH₂; isopropyl (CH₂)₄NH₂; isopropyl (CH₂)₃NHCONH₂; benzyl (CH₂)₃NHCONH₂; isobutyl (CH₂)₃NHCONH₂; sec-butyl (CH₂)₃NHCONH₂;

(CH₂)₃NHCONH₂; benzyl methyl; and benzyl (CH₂)₃NHC(═NH)NH₂; (VIII)

wherein R²⁰⁰, R²⁰¹ and R²⁰² are as follows:

R²⁰⁰ R²⁰¹ R²⁰² benzyl benzyl (CH₂)₄NH₂; isopropyl benzyl (CH₂)₄NH₂; and H benzyl (CH₂)₄NH₂; (IX)

wherein R²⁰⁰, R²⁰¹, R²⁰² and R²⁰³ are as follows:

R²⁰⁰ R²⁰¹ R²⁰² R²⁰³ H benzyl isobutyl H; and methyl isobutyl methyl isobutyl.

Exemplary Amino Acid units include, but are not limited to, units of formula (VII) where: R²⁰⁰ is benzyl and R²⁰¹ is —(CH₂)₄NH₂; R²⁰⁰ isopropyl and R²⁰¹ is —(CH₂)₄NH₂; R²⁰⁰ isopropyl and R²⁰¹ is —(CH₂)₃NHCONH₂. Another exemplary Amino Acid unit is a unit of formula (VIII) wherein R²⁰⁰ is benzyl, R²⁰¹ is benzyl, and R²⁰² is —(CH₂)₄NH₂.

Useful -W_(w)- units can be designed and optimized in their selectivity for enzymatic cleavage by a particular enzymes, for example, a tumor-associated protease. In one embodiment, a -W_(w)- unit is that whose cleavage is catalyzed by cathepsin B, C and D, or a plasmin protease.

In one embodiment, -W_(w)- is a dipeptide, tripeptide, tetrapeptide or pentapeptide.

When R¹⁹⁰, R²⁰⁰, R²⁰¹, R²⁰² or R²⁰³ is other than hydrogen, the carbon atom to which R¹⁹⁰, R²⁰⁰, R²⁰¹, R²⁰² or R²⁰³ is attached is chiral.

Each carbon atom to which R¹⁹⁰, R²⁰⁰, R²⁰¹, R²⁰² or R²⁰³ is attached is independently in the (S) or (R) configuration.

In one aspect of the Amino Acid unit, the Amino Acid unit is valine-citrulline. In another aspect, the Amino Acid unit is phenylalanine-lysine (i.e. fk). In yet another aspect of the Amino Acid unit, the Amino Acid unit is N-methylvaline-citrulline. In yet another aspect, the Amino Acid unit is 5-aminovaleric acid, homo phenylalanine lysine, tetraisoquinolinecarboxylate lysine, cyclohexylalanine lysine, isonepecotic acid lysine, beta-alanine lysine, glycine serine valine glutamine (SEQ ID NO:1) or isonepecotic acid.

In certain embodiments, the Amino Acid unit can comprise natural amino acids. In other embodiments, the Amino Acid unit can comprise non-natural amino acids.

4. The Spacer Unit

The Spacer unit (-Y-), when present, links an Amino Acid unit to the Drug moiety when an Amino Acid unit is present. Alternately, the Spacer unit links the Stretcher unit to the Drug moiety when the Amino Acid unit is absent. The Spacer unit also links the Drug moiety to the Ligand unit when both the Amino Acid unit and Stretcher unit are absent.

Spacer units are of two general types: self-immolative and non self-immolative. A non self-immolative Spacer unit is one in which part or all of the Spacer unit remains bound to the Drug moiety after cleavage, particularly enzymatic, of an Amino Acid unit from the Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugate or the Drug-Linker Compound. Examples of a non self-immolative Spacer unit include, but are not limited to a (glycine-glycine) Spacer unit and a glycine Spacer unit (both depicted in Scheme 1) (infra). When an Exemplary Compound containing a glycine-glycine Spacer unit or a glycine Spacer unit undergoes enzymatic cleavage via a tumor-cell associated-protease, a cancer-cell-associated protease or a lymphocyte-associated protease, a glycine-glycine-Drug moiety or a glycine-Drug moiety is cleaved from L-A_(a)-W_(w)-. In one embodiment, an independent hydrolysis reaction takes place within the target cell, cleaving the glycine-Drug moiety bond and liberating the Drug.

In one embodiment, a non self-immolative Spacer unit (-Y-) is -Gly-Gly-. In another embodiment, a non self-immolative the Spacer unit (-Y-) is -Gly-.

In another embodiment, -Y_(y)- is a p-aminobenzyl alcohol (PAB) unit (see Schemes 2 and 3, infra) whose phenylene portion is substituted with Q_(m) wherein Q is —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -halogen, -nitro or -cyano; and m is an integer ranging from 0-4.

In one embodiment, a Drug-Linker Compound or a Drug-Linker Ligand Conjugate is provided in which the Spacer unit is absent (y=0), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.

Alternatively, an Exemplary Compound containing a self-immolative Spacer unit can release -D without the need for a separate hydrolysis step. In this embodiment, -Y- is a PAB group that is linked to -W_(w)- via the amino nitrogen atom of the PAB group, and connected directly to -D via a carbonate, carbamate or ether group. Without being bound by any particular theory or mechanism, Scheme 2 depicts a possible mechanism of Drug release of a PAB group which is attached directly to -D via a carbamate or carbonate group espoused by Toki et al., 2002, J. Org. Chem. 67:1866-1872.

In the compounds represented in Scheme 2, Q is —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -halogen, -nitro or -cyano; m is an integer ranging from 0-4; and p is an integer from about 1 to about 20.

Without being bound by any particular theory or mechanism, Scheme 3 depicts a possible mechanism of Drug release of a PAB group which is attached directly to -D via an ether or amine linkage.

In the compounds shown in Scheme 3, Q is —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -halogen, -nitro or -cyano; m is an integer ranging from 0-4; and p is an integer from about 1 to about 20.

Other examples of self-immolative spacers include, but are not limited to, aromatic compounds that are electronically similar to the PAB group such as 2-aminoimidazol-5-methanol derivatives (see, e.g., Hay et al., 1999, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 9:2237) and ortho or para-aminobenzylacetals. Spacers can be used that undergo cyclization upon amide bond hydrolysis, such as substituted and unsubstituted 4-aminobutyric acid amides (see, e.g., Rodrigues et al., 1995, Chemistry Biology 2:223), appropriately substituted bicyclo[2.2.1] and bicyclo[2.2.2] ring systems (see, e.g., Storm et al., 1972, J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 94:5815) and 2-aminophenylpropionic acid amides (see, e.g., Amsberry et al., 1990, J. Org. Chem. 55:5867). Elimination of amine-containing drugs that are substituted at the α-position of glycine (see, e.g., Kingsbury et al., 1984, J. Med. Chem. 27:1447) are also examples of self-immolative spacer useful in Exemplary Compounds.

In one embodiment, the Spacer unit is a branched bis(hydroxymethyl)styrene (BHMS) unit as depicted in Scheme 4, which can be used to incorporate and release multiple drugs.

In the compound shown in Scheme 4, Q is —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -halogen, -nitro or -cyano; m is an integer ranging from 0-4; n is 0 or 1; and p ranges raging from 1 to about 20.

In one embodiment, the -D moieties are the same. In yet another embodiment, the -D moieties are different.

In one aspect, Spacer units (-Y_(y)-) are represented by Formulas (X)-(XII):

wherein Q is —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -halogen, -nitro or -cyano; and m is an integer ranging from 0-4;

Some embodiments of the Formula Ia′ Antibody Drug Conjugate compounds include:

wherein w and y are each 0,

5. The Drug Unit (Moiety)

The drug moiety (D) is of the dolastatin/auristatin type (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,635,483; and 5,780,588) which have been shown to interfere with microtubule dynamics, GTP hydrolysis, and nuclear and cellular division (see Woyke et al., 2001, Antimicrob. Agents and Chemother. 45(12):3580-3584) and have anticancer (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,663,149) activity. Some dolastatins have antifungal activity (see, e.g., Pettit et al., 1998, Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 42:2961-2965).

D is a Drug unit (moiety) having a nitrogen atom that can form a bond with the Spacer unit when y=1 or 2, with the C-terminal carboxyl group of an Amino Acid unit when y=0, with the carboxyl group of a Stretcher unit when w and y=0, and with a Reactive Site of a Ligand unit when a, w, and y=0. It is to be understood that the terms “Drug unit” and “Drug moiety” are synonymous and used interchangeably herein.

In one embodiment, -D is:

wherein, R² is selected from H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R³ is selected from H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); R⁴ is selected from H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, C₁-C₈ alkyl-aryl, C₁-C₈ alkyl-(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and C₁-C₈ alkyl-(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); R⁵ is selected from H and methyl. Alternatively, R⁴ and R⁵ jointly form a carbocyclic ring and have the formula —(CR^(a)R^(b))_(n)—, wherein R^(a) and R^(b) are independently selected from H, C₁-C₈ alkyl and C₃-C₈ carbocycle and n is selected from 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6. The substituent R⁶ is selected from H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁷ is selected from H, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); each R⁸ is independently selected from H, OH, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle and O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl); X¹ is a C₁₋₁₀ alkylene; and the moiety —NR⁹Z¹ is a phenylalanine bioisostere of any of the above embodiments

In one embodiment, R³, R⁴ and R⁷ are independently isopropyl or sec-butyl and R⁵ is —H. In an exemplary embodiment, R³ and R⁴ are each isopropyl, R⁵ is H, and R⁷ is sec-butyl.

In another embodiment, R² and R⁶ are each methyl, and R⁹ is H.

In still another embodiment, each occurrence of R⁸ is —OCH₃.

In an exemplary embodiment, R³ and R⁴ are each isopropyl, R² and R⁶ are each methyl, R⁵ is H, R⁷ is sec-butyl, each occurrence of R⁸ is —OCH₃, and R⁹ is H.

Illustrative Drug units (-D) include the drug units have the following structure

and pharmaceutically acceptable salts or solvates thereof, wherein r¹⁰ and Z² have the meaning provided above for the drug (D) as set forth form Formula I, Ia, Ia′ and Ic.

In one aspect, hydrophilic groups, such as but not limited to triethylene glycol esters (TEG) can be attached to the Drug Unit. Without being bound by theory, the hydrophilic groups assist in the internalization and non-agglomeration of the Drug Unit.

6. The Ligand Unit

The Ligand unit (L-) includes within its scope any unit of a Ligand (L) that binds or reactively associates or complexes with a receptor, antigen or other receptive moiety associated with a given target-cell population. A Ligand unit is a molecule that binds to, complexes with, or reacts with a receptor, antigen or other receptive moiety of a cell population sought to be therapeutically or otherwise biologically modified. In one aspect, the Ligand unit acts to deliver the Drug unit to the particular target cell population with which the Ligand unit interacts. Such Ligands include, but are not limited to, large molecular weight proteins such as, for example, full-length antibodies, antibody fragments, smaller molecular weight proteins, polypeptide or peptides, lectins, glycoproteins, non-peptides, vitamins, nutrient-transport molecules (such as, but not limited to, transferring, or any other cell binding molecule or substance.

A Ligand unit can form a bond to a Stretcher unit, an Amino Acid unit, a Spacer Unit, or a Drug Unit. A Ligand unit can form a bond to a Linker unit via a heteroatom of the Ligand. Heteroatoms that may be present on a Ligand unit include sulfur (in one embodiment, from a sulfhydryl group of a Ligand), oxygen (in one embodiment, from a carbonyl, carboxyl or hydroxyl group of a Ligand) and nitrogen (in one embodiment, from a primary or secondary amino group of a Ligand). These heteroatoms can be present on the Ligand in the Ligand's natural state, for example a naturally-occurring antibody, or can be introduced into the Ligand via chemical modification.

In one embodiment, a Ligand has a sulfhydryl group and the Ligand bonds to the Linker unit via the sulfhydryl group's sulfur atom.

In another embodiment, the Ligand has lysine residues that can react with activated esters (such esters include, but are not limited to, N-hydroxysuccinimde, pentafluorophenyl, and p-nitrophenyl esters) of the Linker and thus form an amide bond consisting of the nitrogen atom of the Ligand and the C═O group of the Linker.

In yet another aspect, the Ligand has one or more lysine residues that can be chemically modified to introduce one or more sulfhydryl groups. The Ligand unit bonds to the Linker unit via the sulfhydryl group's sulfur atom. The reagents that can be used to modify lysines include, but are not limited to, N-succinimidyl S-acetylthioacetate (SATA) and 2-Iminothiolane hydrochloride (Traut's Reagent).

In another embodiment, the Ligand can have one or more carbohydrate groups that can be chemically modified to have one or more sulfhydryl groups. The Ligand unit bonds to the Linker unit, such as the Stretcher Unit, via the sulfhydryl group's sulfur atom.

In yet another embodiment, the Ligand can have one or more carbohydrate groups that can be oxidized to provide an aldehyde (—CHO) group (see, e.g., Laguzza, et al., 1989, J. Med. Chem. 32(3):548-55). The corresponding aldehyde can form a bond with a Reactive Site on a Stretcher. Reactive sites on a Stretcher that can react with a carbonyl group on a Ligand include, but are not limited to, hydrazine and hydroxylamine. Other protocols for the modification of proteins for the attachment or association of Drug Units are described in Coligan et al., Current Protocols in Protein Science, vol. 2, John Wiley & Sons (2002) (incorporated herein by reference).

Useful non-immunoreactive protein, polypeptide, or peptide Ligands include, but are not limited to, transferrin, epidermal growth factors (“EGF”), bombesin, gastrin, gastrin-releasing peptide, platelet-derived growth factor, IL-2, IL-6, transforming growth factors (“TGF”), such as TGF-α and TGF-β, vaccinia growth factor (“VGF”), insulin and insulin-like growth factors I and II, somatostatin, lectins and apoprotein from low density lipoprotein.

Useful polyclonal antibodies are heterogeneous populations of antibody molecules derived from the sera of immunized animals. Useful monoclonal antibodies are homogeneous populations of antibodies to a particular antigenic determinant (e.g., a cancer cell antigen, a viral antigen, a microbial antigen, a protein, a peptide, a carbohydrate, a chemical, nucleic acid, or fragments thereof). A monoclonal antibody (mAb) to an antigen-of-interest can be prepared by using any technique known in the art which provides for the production of antibody molecules by continuous cell lines in culture.

Useful monoclonal antibodies include, but are not limited to, human monoclonal antibodies, humanized monoclonal antibodies, antibody fragments, or chimeric human-mouse (or other species) monoclonal antibodies. Human monoclonal antibodies may be made by any of numerous techniques known in the art (e.g., Teng et al, 1983, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 80:7308-7312; Kozbor et al., 1983, Immunology Today 4:72-79; and Olsson et al., 1982, Meth. Enzymol. 92:3-16).

The antibody can also be a bispecific antibody. Methods for making bispecific antibodies are known in the art and are discussed infra.

The antibody can be a functionally active fragment, derivative or analog of an antibody that immunospecifically binds to target cells (e.g., cancer cell antigens, viral antigens, or microbial antigens) or other antibodies bound to tumor cells or matrix. In this regard, “functionally active” means that the fragment, derivative or analog is able to elicit anti-anti-idiotype antibodies that recognize the same antigen that the antibody from which the fragment, derivative or analog is derived recognized. Specifically, in an exemplary embodiment the antigenicity of the idiotype of the immunoglobulin molecule can be enhanced by deletion of framework and CDR sequences that are C-terminal to the CDR sequence that specifically recognizes the antigen. To determine which CDR sequences bind the antigen, synthetic peptides containing the CDR sequences can be used in binding assays with the antigen by any binding assay method known in the art (e.g., the BIA core assay) (See, e.g., Kabat et al., 1991, Sequences of Proteins of Immunological Interest, Fifth Edition, National Institute of Health, Bethesda, Md; Kabat E et al., 1980, J. Immunology 125(3):961-969).

Other useful antibodies include fragments of antibodies such as, but not limited to, F(ab′)₂ fragments, Fab fragments, Fvs, single chain antibodies, diabodies, tribodies, tetrabodies, scfv, scFv-FV, or any other molecule with the same specificity as the antibody.

Additionally, recombinant antibodies, such as chimeric and humanized monoclonal antibodies, comprising both human and non-human portions, which can be made using standard recombinant DNA techniques, are useful antibodies. A chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as for example, those having a variable region derived from a murine monoclonal and human immunoglobulin constant regions. (See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,816,567; and 4,816,397, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.) Humanized antibodies are antibody molecules from non-human species having one or more complementarity determining regions (CDRs) from the non-human species and a framework region from a human immunoglobulin molecule. (See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,585,089, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.) Such chimeric and humanized monoclonal antibodies can be produced by recombinant DNA techniques known in the art, for example using methods described in International Publication No. WO 87/02671; European Patent Publication No. 0 184 187; European Patent Publication No. 0 171 496; European Patent Publication No. 0 173 494; International Publication No. WO 86/01533; U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567; European Patent Publication No. 012 023; Berter et al., 1988, Science 240:1041-1043; Liu et al., 1987, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:3439-3443; Liu et al., 1987, J. Immunol. 139:3521-3526; Sun et al., 1987, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:214-218; Nishimura et al., 1987, Cancer. Res. 47:999-1005; Wood et al., 1985, Nature 314:446-449; and Shaw et al., 1988, J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 80:1553-1559; Morrison, 1985, Science 229:1202-1207; Oi et al., 1986, BioTechniques 4:214; U.S. Pat. No. 5,225,539; Jones et al., 1986, Nature 321:552-525; Verhoeyan et al., 1988, Science 239:1534; and Beidler et al., 1988, J. Immunol. 141:4053-4060; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

Completely human antibodies are particularly desirable and can be produced using transgenic mice that are incapable of expressing endogenous immunoglobulin heavy and light chains genes, but which can express human heavy and light chain genes. The transgenic mice are immunized in the normal fashion with a selected antigen, e.g., all or a portion of a polypeptide of the invention. Monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen can be obtained using conventional hybridoma technology. The human immunoglobulin transgenes harbored by the transgenic mice rearrange during B cell differentiation, and subsequently undergo class switching and somatic mutation. Thus, using such a technique, it is possible to produce therapeutically useful IgG, IgA, IgM and IgE antibodies. For an overview of this technology for producing human antibodies, see Lonberg and Huszar, 1995, Int. Rev. Immunol. 13:65-93). For a detailed discussion of this technology for producing human antibodies and human monoclonal antibodies and protocols for producing such antibodies. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,625,126; 5,633,425; 5,569,825; 5,661,016; 5,545,806; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Other human antibodies can be obtained commercially from, for example, Abgenix, Inc. (now Amgen, Freemont, Calif.) and Medarex (Princeton, N.J.).

Completely human antibodies that recognize a selected epitope can be generated using a technique referred to as “guided selection.” In this approach a selected non-human monoclonal antibody, e.g., a mouse antibody, is used to guide the selection of a completely human antibody recognizing the same epitope. (See, e.g., Jespers et al., 1994, Biotechnology 12:899-903). Human antibodies can also be produced using various techniques known in the art, including phage display libraries (see, e.g., Hoogenboom and Winter, 1991, J. Mol. Biol. 227:381; Marks et al., 1991, J. Mol. Biol. 222:581; Quan and Carter, 2002, The rise of monoclonal antibodies as therapeutics, In Anti-IgE and Allergic Disease, Jardieu and Fick, eds., Marcel Dekker, New York, N.Y., Chapter 20, pp. 427-469).

In other embodiments, the antibody is a fusion protein of an antibody, or a functionally active fragment thereof, for example in which the antibody is fused via a covalent bond (e.g., a peptide bond), at either the N-terminus or the C-terminus to an amino acid sequence of another protein (or portion thereof, preferably at least 10, 20 or 50 amino acid portion of the protein) that is not from an antibody. Preferably, the antibody or fragment thereof is covalently linked to the other protein at the N-terminus of the constant domain.

Antibodies include analogs and derivatives that are either modified, i.e., by the covalent attachment of any type of molecule as long as such covalent attachment permits the antibody to retain its antigen binding immunospecificity. For example, but not by way of limitation, derivatives and analogs of the antibodies include those that have been further modified, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, pegylation, phosphorylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to a cellular antibody unit or other protein, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications can be carried out by known techniques including, but not limited to, specific chemical cleavage, acetylation, formylation, metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin, etc. Additionally, the analog or derivative can contain one or more unnatural amino acids.

Antibodies can have modifications (e.g., substitutions, deletions or additions) in amino acid residues that interact with Fc receptors. In particular, antibodies can have modifications in amino acid residues identified as involved in the interaction between the anti-Fc domain and the FcRn receptor (see, e.g., International Publication No. WO 97/34631, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).

Antibodies immunospecific for a cancer cell antigen can be obtained commercially or produced by any method known to one of skill in the art such as, e.g., chemical synthesis or recombinant expression techniques. The nucleotide sequence encoding antibodies immunospecific for a cancer cell antigen can be obtained, e.g., from the GenBank database or a database like it, the literature publications, or by routine cloning and sequencing.

In a specific embodiment, known antibodies for the treatment or prevention of cancer can be used. Antibodies immunospecific for a cancer cell antigen can be obtained commercially or produced by any method known to one of skill in the art such as, e.g., recombinant expression techniques. The nucleotide sequence encoding antibodies immunospecific for a cancer cell antigen can be obtained, e.g., from the GenBank database or a database like it, the literature publications, or by routine cloning and sequencing. Examples of antibodies available for the treatment of cancer include, but are not limited to, RITUXAN® (rituximab; Genentech) which is a chimeric anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody for the treatment of patients with non-Hodgkin's lymphoma; OVAREX which is a murine antibody for the treatment of ovarian cancer; PANOREX (Glaxo Wellcome, NC) which is a murine IgG_(2a) antibody for the treatment of colorectal cancer; Cetuximab ERBITUX (Imclone Systems Inc., NY) which is an anti-EGFR IgG chimeric antibody for the treatment of epidermal growth factor positive cancers, such as head and neck cancer; Vitaxin (MedImmune, Inc., MD) which is a humanized antibody for the treatment of sarcoma; CAMPATH I/H (Leukosite, MA) which is a humanized IgG1 antibody for the treatment of chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL); SMART MI95 (Protein Design Labs, Inc., CA) and SGN-33 (Seattle Genetics, Inc., WA) which is a humanized anti-CD33 IgG antibody for the treatment of acute myeloid leukemia (AML); LYMPHOCIDE (Immunomedics, Inc., NJ) which is a humanized anti-CD22 IgG antibody for the treatment of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma; SMART ID10 (Protein Design Labs, Inc., CA) which is a humanized anti-HLA-DR antibody for the treatment of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma; ONCOLYM (Techniclone, Inc., CA) which is a radiolabeled murine anti-HLA-Dr10 antibody for the treatment of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma; ALLOMUNE (BioTransplant, CA) which is a humanized anti-CD2 mAb for the treatment of Hodgkin's Disease or non-Hodgkin's lymphoma; AVASTIN (Genentech, Inc., CA) which is an anti-VEGF humanized antibody for the treatment of lung and colorectal cancers; EPRATUZAMAB (Immunomedics, Inc., NJ and Amgen, CA) which is an anti-CD22 antibody for the treatment of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma; and CEACIDE (Immunomedics, NJ) which is a humanized anti-CEA antibody for the treatment of colorectal cancer.

Other antibodies useful in the treatment of cancer include, but are not limited to, antibodies against the following antigens (where exemplary cancers that can be treated with the antibody are in parentheses): CA125 (ovarian), CA15-3 (carcinomas), CA19-9 (carcinomas), L6 (carcinomas), Lewis Y (carcinomas), Lewis X (carcinomas), alpha fetoprotein (carcinomas), CA 242 (colorectal), placental alkaline phosphatase (carcinomas), prostate specific antigen (prostate), prostate specific membrane antigen (prostate), prostatic acid phosphatase (prostate), epidermal growth factor (carcinomas), MAGE-1 (carcinomas), MAGE-2 (carcinomas), MAGE-3 (carcinomas), MAGE-4 (carcinomas), anti-transferrin receptor (carcinomas), p97 (melanoma), MUC1-KLH (breast cancer), CEA (colorectal), gp 100 (melanoma), MART1 (melanoma), IL-2 receptor (T-cell leukemia and lymphomas), CD20 (non-Hodgkin's lymphoma), CD52 (leukemia), CD33 (leukemia), CD22 (lymphoma), human chorionic gonadotropin (carcinoma), CD38 (multiple myeloma), CD40 (lymphoma), mucin (carcinomas), P21 (carcinomas), MPG (melanoma), and Neu oncogene product (carcinomas). Some specific, useful antibodies include, but are not limited to, BR96 mAb (Trail et al., 1993, Science 261:212-215), BR64 (Trail et al., 1997, Cancer Research 57:100-105), mAbs against the CD40 antigen, such as S2C6 mAb (Francisco et al., 2000, Cancer Res. 60:3225-3231), mAbs against the CD70 antigen, such as 1F6 mAb, humanized 1F6 in Ab, 2F2 mAb and humanized 2F2 mAb (see, e.g., International Published Application No. WO 04/073656 and U.S. Published Application No. 2006-0083736) and mAbs against the CD30 antigen, such as AC10 (Bowen et al., 1993, J. Immunol. 151:5896-5906; Wahl et al., 2002 Cancer Res. 62(13):3736-42) and MDX-060. Many other internalizing antibodies that bind to tumor associated antigens can be used and have been reviewed (see, e.g., Franke et al., 2000, Cancer Biother. Radiopharm. 15, 459-76; Murray, 2000, Semin Oncol. 27:64-70; Breitling and Dubel, Recombinant Antibodies, John Wiley, and Sons, New York, 1998).

In another specific embodiment, antibodies for the treatment or prevention of an autoimmune disease are used in accordance with the compositions and methods of the invention. Antibodies immunospecific for an antigen of a cell that is responsible for producing autoimmune antibodies can be obtained from any organization (e.g., a university scientist or a company) or produced by any method known to one of skill in the art such as, e.g., chemical synthesis or recombinant expression techniques. In another embodiment, useful antibodies are immunospecific for the treatment of autoimmune diseases include, but are not limited to, anti-nuclear antibody; anti-ds DNA; Anti-ss DNA, anti-cardiolipin antibody IgM, IgG; anti-phospholipid antibody IgM, IgG; anti-SM antibody; anti-mitochondrial antibody; thyroid antibody; microsomal antibody; thyroglobulin antibody; anti-SCL-70 antibody; anti-Jo antibody; anti-U₁RNP antibody; anti-La/SSB antibody; anti-SSA; anti-SSB antibody; anti-perital cells antibody; anti-histones antibody; anti-RNP antibody; C-ANCA antibody; P-ANCA antibody; anti-centromere antibody; Anti-Fibrillarin antibody and anti-GBM antibody.

In certain embodiments, useful antibodies can bind to a receptor or a receptor complex expressed on an activated lymphocyte. The receptor or receptor complex can comprise an immunoglobulin gene superfamily member, a TNF receptor superfamily member, an integrin, a cytokine receptor, a chemokine receptor, a major histocompatibility protein, a lectin, or a complement control protein. Non-limiting examples of suitable immunoglobulin superfamily members are CD2, CD3, CD4, CD8, CD19, CD22, CD28, CD79, CD90, CD152/CTLA-4, PD-1, and ICOS. Non-limiting examples of suitable TNF receptor superfamily members are CD27, CD40, CD95/Fas, CD134/OX40, CD137/4-1BB, TNF-R1, TNFR-2, RANK, TACI, BCMA, osteoprotegerin, Apo2/TRAIL-R1, TRAIL-R2, TRAIL-R3, TRAIL-R4, and APO-3. Non-limiting examples of suitable integrins are CD11a, CD11b, CD11c, CD18, CD29, CD41, CD49a, CD49b, CD49c, CD49d, CD49e, CD49f, CD103, and CD104. Non-limiting examples of suitable lectins are C-type, S-type, and I-type lectin.

In one embodiment, the Ligand unit binds to an activated lymphocyte that is associated with an autoimmune disease.

In another specific embodiment, useful Ligands immunospecific for a viral or a microbial antigen are monoclonal antibodies. The antibodies may be chimeric, humanized or human monoclonal antibodies. As used herein, the term “viral antigen” includes, but is not limited to, any viral peptide, polypeptide protein (e.g., HIV gp120, HIV nef, RSV F glycoprotein, influenza virus neuraminidase, influenza virus hemagglutinin, HTLV tax, herpes simplex virus glycoprotein (e.g., gB, gC, gD, and gE) and hepatitis B surface antigen) that is capable of eliciting an immune response. As used herein, the term “microbial antigen” includes, but is not limited to, any microbial peptide, polypeptide, protein, saccharide, polysaccharide, or lipid molecule (e.g., a bacterial, fungi, pathogenic protozoa, or yeast polypeptide including, e.g., LPS and capsular polysaccharide 5/8) that is capable of eliciting an immune response.

Antibodies immunospecific for a viral or microbial antigen can be obtained commercially, for example, from BD Biosciences (San Francisco, Calif.), Chemicon International, Inc. (Temecula, Calif.), or Vector Laboratories, Inc. (Burlingame, Calif.) or produced by any method known to one of skill in the art such as, e.g., chemical synthesis or recombinant expression techniques. The nucleotide sequence encoding antibodies that are immunospecific for a viral or microbial antigen can be obtained, e.g., from the GenBank database or a database like it, literature publications, or by routine cloning and sequencing.

In a specific embodiment, useful Ligands are those that are useful for the treatment or prevention of viral or microbial infection in accordance with the methods disclosed herein. Examples of antibodies available useful for the treatment of viral infection or microbial infection include, but are not limited to, SYNAGIS (MedImmune, Inc., MD) which is a humanized anti-respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) monoclonal antibody useful for the treatment of patients with RSV infection; PRO542 (Progenics) which is a CD4 fusion antibody useful for the treatment of HIV infection; OSTAVIR (Protein Design Labs, Inc., CA) which is a human antibody useful for the treatment of hepatitis B virus; PROTOVIR (Protein Design Labs, Inc., CA) which is a humanized IgG₁ antibody useful for the treatment of cytomegalovirus (CMV); and anti-LPS antibodies.

Other antibodies useful in the treatment of infectious diseases include, but are not limited to, antibodies against the antigens from pathogenic strains of bacteria (Streptococcus pyogenes, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Neisseria gonorrheae, Neisseria meningitidis, Corynebacterium diphtheriae, Clostridium botulinum, Clostridium perfringens, Clostridium tetani, Hemophilus influenzae, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Klebsiella ozaenas, Klebsiella rhinoscleromotis, Staphylococc aureus, Vibrio colerae, Escherichia coli, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Campylobacter (Vibrio) fetus, Aeromonas hydrophila, Bacillus cereus, Edwardsiella tarda, Yeisinia enterocolitica, Yersinia pestis, Yersinia pseudotuberculosis, Shigella dysenteriae, Shigella flexneri, Shigella sonnei, Salmonella typhimurium, Treponema pallidum, Treponema pertenue, Treponema carateneum, Borrelia vincentii, Borrelia burgdorferi, Leptospira icterohemorrhagiae, Mycobacterium tuberculosis, Pneumocystis carinii, Francisella tularensis, Brucella abortus, Brucella suis, Brucella melitensis, Mycoplasma spp., Rickettsia prowazeki, Rickettsia tsutsugumushi, and Chlamydia spp.); pathogenic fungi (Coccidioides immitis, Aspergillus fumigatus, Candida albicans, Blastomyces dermatitidis, Cryptococcus neoformans, and Histoplasma capsulatum); protozoa (Entomoeba histolytica, Toxoplasma gondii, Trichomonas tenas, Trichomonas hominis, Trichomonas vaginalis, Tryoanosoma gambiense, Trypanosoma rhodesiense, Trypanosoma cruzi, Leishmania donovani, Leishmania tropica, Leishmania braziliensis, Pneumocystis pneumonia, Plasmodium vivax, Plasmodium falciparum, Plasmodium malaria); or Helminiths (Enterobius vermicularis, Trichuris trichiura, Ascaris lumbricoides, Trichinella spiralis, Strongyloides stercoralis, Schistosoma japonicum, Schistosoma mansoni, Schistosoma haematobium, and hookworms).

Other antibodies useful in this invention for treatment of viral disease include, but are not limited to, antibodies against antigens of pathogenic viruses, including as examples and not by limitation: Poxyiridae, Herpesviridae, Herpes Simplex virus 1, Herpes Simplex virus 2, Adenoviridae, Papovaviridae, Enteroviridae, Picornaviridae, Parvoviridae, Reoviridae, Retroviridae, influenza viruses, parainfluenza viruses, mumps, measles, respiratory syncytial virus, rubella, Arboviridae, Rhabdoviridae, Arenaviridae, Hepatitis A virus, Hepatitis B virus, Hepatitis C virus, Hepatitis E virus, Non-A/Non-B Hepatitis virus, Rhinoviridae, Coronaviridae, Rotoviridae, and Human Immunodeficiency Virus.

In attempts to discover effective cellular targets for cancer diagnosis and therapy, researchers have sought to identify transmembrane or otherwise tumor-associated polypeptides that are specifically expressed on the surface of one or more particular type(s) of cancer cell as compared to on one or more normal non-cancerous cell(s). Often, such tumor-associated polypeptides are more abundantly expressed on the surface of the cancer cells as compared to on the surface of the non-cancerous cells. The identification of such tumor-associated cell surface antigen polypeptides has given rise to the ability to specifically target cancer cells for destruction via antibody-based therapies.

In an exemplary embodiment, the Ligand-Linker-Drug Conjugate has Formula IIIa, where the Ligand is an antibody Ab that binds at least one of CD20, CD30, CD33, CD40, CD70, BCMA, and Lewis Y antigen, w=0, y=0, and D has Formula Ib. Exemplary Conjugates of Formula IIIa include those in which R¹⁷ is —(CH₂)₅—. Also included are such Conjugates of Formula IIIa containing about 2 to about 8, or about 2 to about 6 Drug moieties D per Ligand unit (that is, Conjugates of Formula Ia wherein p is a value in the range about 2-8, for example about 2-6). Conjugates containing combinations of the structural features noted in this paragraph are also contemplated as within the scope of the compounds of the invention.

In another embodiment, the Ligand-Linker-Drug Conjugate has Formula IIIa, where Ligand is an Antibody Ab that binds one of CD20, CD30, CD33, CD40, CD70, BCMA, and Lewis Y antigen, w=1, y=0, and D has Formula Ib. Included are such Conjugates of Formula IIIa in which R¹⁷ is —(CH₂)₅—. Also included are such Conjugates of Formula IIIa containing about 2 to about 8, or about 2 to about 6 Drug moieties D per Ligand unit (that is, Conjugates of Formula Ia wherein p is a value in the range of about 2-8, or about 2-6). Conjugates containing combinations of the structural features noted in this paragraph are also exemplary.

In another embodiment, the Ligand-Linker-Drug Conjugate has Formula IIIa, where the Ligand is an Antibody Ab that binds one of CD20, CD30, CD33, CD40, CD70, BCMA, and Lewis Y antigen, w=1, y=1, and D has Formula Ib. Included are Conjugates of Formula IIIa in which R¹⁷ is —(CH₂)₅—. Conjugates containing combinations of the structural features noted in this paragraph are also contemplated within the scope of the compounds of the invention.

a) Production of Recombinant Antibodies

Antibodies of the invention can be produced using any method known in the art to be useful for the synthesis of antibodies, in particular, by chemical synthesis or by recombinant expression.

Recombinant expression of antibodies, or fragment, derivative or analog thereof, requires construction of a nucleic acid that encodes the antibody. If the nucleotide sequence of the antibody is known, a nucleic acid encoding the antibody may be assembled from chemically synthesized oligonucleotides (e.g., as described in Kutmeier et al., 1994, BioTechniques 17:242), which involves the synthesis of overlapping oligonucleotides containing portions of the sequence encoding the antibody, annealing and ligation of those oligonucleotides, and then amplification of the ligated oligonucleotides, e.g., by PCR.

Alternatively, a nucleic acid molecule encoding an antibody can be generated from a suitable source. If a clone containing the nucleic acid encoding the particular antibody is not available, but the sequence of the antibody is known, a nucleic acid encoding the antibody can be obtained from a suitable source (e.g., an antibody cDNA library, or cDNA library generated from any tissue or cells expressing the immunoglobulin) by, e.g., PCR amplification using synthetic primers hybridizable to the 3′ and 5′ ends of the sequence or by cloning using an oligonucleotide probe specific for the particular gene sequence.

If an antibody that specifically recognizes a particular antigen is not commercially available (or a source for a cDNA library for cloning a nucleic acid encoding such an immunoglobulin), antibodies specific for a particular antigen can be generated by any method known in the art, for example, by immunizing a non-human animal, or suitable animal model such as a rabbit or mouse, to generate polyclonal antibodies or, more preferably, by generating monoclonal antibodies, e.g., as described by Kohler and Milstein (1975, Nature 256:495-497) or as described by Kozbor et al (1983, Immunology Today 4:72) or Cole et al. (1985 in Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy, Alan R. Liss, Inc., pp. 77-96). Alternatively, a clone encoding at least the Fab portion of the antibody can be obtained by screening Fab expression libraries (e.g., as described in Huse et al., 1989, Science 246:1275-1281) for clones of Fab fragments that bind the specific antigen or by screening antibody libraries (see, e.g., Clackson et al., 1991, Nature 352:624; Hane et al., 1997, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94:4937).

Once a nucleic acid sequence encoding at least the variable domain of the antibody is obtained, it can be introduced into a vector containing the nucleotide sequence encoding the constant regions of the antibody (see, e.g., International Publication No. WO 86/05807; WO 89/01036; and U.S. Pat. No. 5,122,464). Vectors containing the complete light or heavy chain that allow for the expression of a complete antibody molecule are available. The nucleic acid encoding the antibody can be used to introduce the nucleotide substitutions or deletion necessary to substitute (or delete) the one or more variable region cysteine residues participating in an intrachain disulfide bond with an amino acid residue that does not contain a sulfhydyl group. Such modifications can be carried out by any method known in the art for the introduction of specific mutations or deletions in a nucleotide sequence, for example, but not limited to, chemical mutagenesis and in vitro site directed mutagenesis (Hutchinson et al., 1978, J. Biol. Chem. 253:6551).

In addition, techniques developed for the production of “chimeric antibodies” (see, e.g., Morrison et al., 1984, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 81:851-855; Neuberger et al., 1984, Nature 312:604-608; Takeda et al., 1985, Nature 314:452-454) by splicing genes from a mouse antibody molecule of appropriate antigen specificity together with genes from a human antibody molecule of appropriate biological activity can be used. A chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as those having a variable region derived from a murine monoclonal antibody and a human immunoglobulin constant region, e.g., humanized antibodies.

Alternatively, techniques described for the production of single chain antibodies (U.S. Pat. No. 4,694,778; Bird, 1988, Science 242:423-42; Huston et al., 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:5879-5883; and Ward et al., 1989, Nature 334:544-54) can be adapted to produce single chain antibodies. Single chain antibodies are formed by linking the heavy and light chain fragments of the Fv region via an amino acid bridge, resulting in a single chain polypeptide. Techniques for the assembly of functional Fv fragments in E. coli may also be used (Skerra et al., 1988, Science 242:1038-1041).

Antibody fragments that recognize specific epitopes can be generated by known techniques. For example, such fragments include F(ab′)₂ fragments, Fab fragments, Fv fragments, diabodies, triabodies, tetrabodies, single chain antibodies, scFv, scFv-Fc and the like.

Once a nucleic acid sequence encoding an antibody has been obtained, the vector for the production of the antibody can be produced by recombinant DNA technology using techniques well known in the art. Methods that are well known to those skilled in the art can be used to construct expression vectors containing the antibody coding sequences and appropriate transcriptional and translational control signals. These methods include, for example, in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo genetic recombination. See, for example, the techniques described in Sambrook et al. (1990, Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual, 2^(nd) Ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.; 2001; Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual, 3rd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Publish., Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.) and Ausubel et al., eds., in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology series of laboratory technique manuals, 1987-1999, Current Protocols©, 1994-199 John Wiley and Sons, Inc.).

An expression vector comprising the nucleotide sequence of an antibody or the nucleotide sequence of an antibody can be transferred to a host cell by conventional techniques (e.g., electroporation, liposomal transfection, and calcium phosphate precipitation), and the transfected cells are then cultured by conventional techniques to produce the antibody. In specific embodiments, the expression of the antibody is regulated by a constitutive, an inducible or a tissue, specific promoter.

The host cells used to express the recombinant antibody can be either bacterial cells such as Escherichia coli or eukaryotic cells, especially for the expression of whole recombinant immunoglobulin molecule. In particular, mammalian cells such as Chinese hamster ovary cells (CHO), in conjunction with a vector such as the major intermediate early gene promoter element from human cytomegalovirus is an effective expression system for immunoglobulins (Foecking et al., 198, Gene 45:101; Cockett et al., 1990, BioTechnology 8:2).

A variety of host-expression vector systems can be utilized to express the immunoglobulin antibodies. Such host-expression systems represent vehicles by which the coding sequences of the antibody can be produced and subsequently purified, but also represent cells that can, when transformed or transfected with the appropriate nucleotide coding sequences, express an antibody immunoglobulin molecule in situ. These include, but are not limited to, microorganisms such as bacteria (e.g., E. coli and B. subtilis) transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA, plasmid DNA or cosmid DNA expression vectors containing immunoglobulin coding sequences; yeast (e.g., Saccharomyces Pichia) transformed with recombinant yeast expression vectors containing immunoglobulin coding sequences; insect cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus) containing the immunoglobulin coding sequences; plant cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus (CaMV) and tobacco mosaic virus (TMV)) or transformed with recombinant plasmid expression vectors (e.g., Ti plasmid) containing immunoglobulin coding sequences; or mammalian cell systems (e.g., COS, CHO, BH, 293, 293T, or 3T3 cells) harboring recombinant expression constructs containing promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalian viruses (e.g., the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5K promoter).

In bacterial systems, a number of expression vectors can be advantageously selected depending upon the use intended for the antibody being expressed. For example, when a large quantity of such a protein is to be produced, vectors that direct the expression of high levels of fusion protein products that are readily purified might be desirable. Such vectors include, but are not limited, to the E. coli expression vector pUR278 (Ruther et al., 1983, EMBO J. 2:1791), in which the antibody coding sequence may be ligated individually into the vector in frame with the lac Z coding region so that a fusion protein is produced; pIN vectors (Inouye & Inouye, 1985, Nucleic Acids Res. 13:3101-3109; Van Heeke & Schuster, 1989, J. Biol. Chem. 24:5503-5509); and the like. pGEX Vectors can also be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST). In general, such fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption and binding to a matrix glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione. The pGEX vectors are designed to include thrombin or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned target gene product can be released from the GST moiety.

In an insect system, Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) or the analogous virus from Drosophila Melanogaster can be used as a vector to express foreign genes. The virus grows in Spodoptera frugiperda cells. The antibody coding sequence can be cloned individually into non-essential regions (for example the polyhedrin gene) of the virus and placed under control of an AcNPV promoter (for example the polyhedrin promoter).

In mammalian host cells, a number of viral-based expression systems can be utilized. In cases where an adenovirus is used as an expression vector, the antibody coding sequence of interest can be ligated to an adenovirus transcription/translation control complex, e.g., the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. This chimeric gene can then be inserted in the adenovirus genome by in vitro or in vivo recombination. Insertion in a non-essential region of the viral genome (e.g., region E1 or E3) results in a recombinant virus that is viable and capable of expressing the immunoglobulin molecule in infected hosts. (e.g., see Logan & Shenk, 1984, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81:355-359). Specific initiation signals can also be required for efficient translation of inserted antibody coding sequences. These signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. Furthermore, the initiation codon must be in phase with the reading frame of the desired coding sequence to ensure translation of the entire insert. These exogenous translational control signals and initiation codons can be of a variety of origins, both natural and synthetic. The efficiency of expression can be enhanced by the inclusion of appropriate transcription enhancer elements, transcription terminators, etc. (see, e.g., Bittner et al., 1987, Methods in Enzymol. 153:51-544). In some embodiments, antibodies can be expressed using the CHEF system. (See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,888,809; the disclosure of which is incorporated by reference herein.)

In addition, a host cell strain can be chosen to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences, or modifies and processes the gene product in the specific fashion desired. Such modifications (e.g., glycosylation) and processing (e.g., cleavage) of protein products can be important for the function of the protein. Different host cells have characteristic and specific mechanisms for the post-translational processing and modification of proteins and gene products. Appropriate cell lines or host systems can be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein expressed. To this end, eukaryotic host cells that possess the cellular machinery for proper processing of the primary transcript, glycosylation, and phosphorylation of the gene product can be used. Such mammalian host cells include, but are not limited to, CHO (e.g., DG44), VERY, BH, Hela, COS, MDCK, 293, 293T, 3T3, WI38, BT483, Hs578T, HTB2, BT20 and T47D, CRL7030 and Hs578Bst.

For long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins, stable expression is typically used. For example, cell lines that stably express an antibody can be engineered. Rather than using expression vectors that contain viral origins of replication, host cells can be transformed with DNA controlled by appropriate expression control elements (e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcription terminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.), and a selectable marker. Following the introduction of the foreign DNA, engineered cells can be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media, and then are switched to a selective media. The selectable marker in the recombinant plasmid confers resistance to the selection and allows cells to stably integrate the plasmid into their chromosomes and grow to form foci that in turn can be cloned and expanded into cell lines. This method can advantageously be used to engineer cell lines which express the antibody. Such engineered cell lines can be particularly useful in screening and evaluation of tumor antigens that interact directly or indirectly with the antibody.

A number of selection systems can be used, including but not limited to the herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler et al., 1977, Cell 11:223), hypoxanthine-guanine phosphoribosyltransferase (Szybalska & Szybalski, 1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 48:202), and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase (Lowy et al., 1980, Cell 22:817) genes can be employed in tk⁻, hgprt⁻ or aprt− cells, respectively. Also, antimetabolite resistance can be used as the basis of selection for the following genes: DHFR, which confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et al., 1980, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:357; O'Hare et al., 1981, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 78:1527); gpt, which confers resistance to mycophenolic acid (Mulligan & Berg, 1981, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 78:2072); neo, which confers resistance to the aminoglycoside G-418 (Clinical Pharmacy 12:488-505; Wu and Wu, 1991, Biotherapy 3:87-95; Tolstoshev, 1993, Ann. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol. 32:573-596; Mulligan, 1993, Science 260:926-932; and Morgan and Anderson, 1993, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 62:191-217; May, 1993, TIB TECH 11(5):155-215) and hygro, which confers resistance to hygromycin (Santerre et al., 1984, Gene 30:147). Methods commonly known in the art of recombinant DNA technology which can be used are described in Ausubel et al (supra; Kriegler, 1990, Gene Transfer and Expression, A Laboratory Manual, Stockton Press, NY; and in Chapters 12 and 13, Dracopoli et al. (eds), 1994, Current Protocols in Human Genetics, John Wiley & Sons, NY.; Colberre-Garapin et al., 1981, J. Mol. Biol. 150:1).

The expression levels of an antibody can be increased by vector amplification (for a review, see Bebbington and Hentschel, The use of vectors based on gene amplification for the expression of cloned genes in mammalian cells in DNA cloning, Vol. 3. (Academic Press, New York, 1987)). When a marker in the vector system expressing an antibody is amplifiable, an increase in the level of inhibitor present in culture of host cell will increase the number of copies of the marker gene. Since the amplified region is associated with the nucleotide sequence of the antibody, production of the antibody will also increase (see, e.g., Crouse et al., 1983, Mol. Cell. Biol. 3:257).

The host cell can be co-transfected with two expression vectors, the first vector encoding a heavy chain derived polypeptide and the second vector encoding a light chain derived polypeptide. The two vectors can contain identical selectable markers that enable equal expression of heavy and light chain polypeptides. Alternatively, a single vector can be used to encode both heavy and light chain polypeptides. In such situations, the light chain is typically placed before the heavy chain to avoid an excess of toxic free heavy chain (see, e.g., Proudfoot, 1986, Nature 322:52; Kohler, 1980, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77:2197). The coding sequences for the heavy and light chains can comprise cDNA or genomic DNA.

Once the antibody has been recombinantly expressed, it can be purified using any method known in the art for purification of an antibody, for example, by chromatography (e.g., ion exchange, affinity, particularly by affinity for the specific antigen after Protein A, and sizing column chromatography), centrifugation, differential solubility, or by any other standard technique for the purification of proteins.

In yet another exemplary embodiment, the antibody is a monoclonal antibody.

b) Production of Antibodies

The production of antibodies will be illustrated with reference to anti-CD30 antibodies but it will be apparent for those skilled in the art that antibodies to other targets (such as members of the TNF receptor family) can be produced and modified in a similar manner. The use of CD30 for the production of antibodies is exemplary only and not intended to be limiting.

The CD30 antigen to be used for production of antibodies may be, e.g., a soluble form of the extracellular domain of CD30 or a portion thereof, containing the desired epitope. Alternatively, cells expressing CD30 at their cell surface (e.g., L540 (Hodgkin's lymphoma derived cell line with a T cell phenotype) and L428 (Hodgkin's lymphoma derived cell line with a B cell phenotype)) can be used to generate antibodies. Other forms of CD30 useful for generating antibodies will be apparent to those skilled in the art.

(1) Polyclonal Antibodies

Polyclonal antibodies are preferably raised in animals by multiple subcutaneous (sc) or intraperitoneal (ip) injections of the relevant antigen and an adjuvant. It may be useful to conjugate the relevant antigen to a protein that is immunogenic in the species to be immunized, e.g., keyhole limpet hemocyanin, serum albumin, bovine thyroglobulin, or soybean trypsin inhibitor using a bifunctional or derivatizing agent, for example, maleimidobenzoyl sulfosuccinimide ester (conjugation through cysteine residues), N-hydroxysuccinimide (through lysine residues), glutaraldehyde, succinic anhydride, SOCl₂, or R¹N═C═NR, where R and R¹ are different alkyl groups.

Animals are immunized against the antigen, immunogenic conjugates, or derivatives by combining, e.g., 100 μg or 5 μg of the protein or conjugate (for rabbits or mice, respectively) with 3 volumes of Freund's complete adjuvant and injecting the solution intradermally at multiple sites. One month later the animals are boosted with ⅕ to 1/10 the original amount of peptide or conjugate in Freund's complete adjuvant by subcutaneous injection at multiple sites. Seven to 14 days later the animals are bled and the serum is assayed for antibody titer. Animals are boosted until the titer plateaus. Typically, the animal is boosted with the conjugate of the same antigen, but conjugated to a different protein and/or through a different cross-linking reagent. Conjugates also can be made in recombinant cell culture as protein fusions. Also, aggregating agents such as alum are suitably used to enhance the immune response.

(2) Monoclonal Antibodies

Monoclonal antibodies are obtained from a population of substantially homogeneous antibodies, i.e., the individual antibodies comprising the population are identical except for possible naturally-occurring mutations that may be present in minor amounts. Thus, the modifier “monoclonal” indicates the character of the antibody as not being a mixture of discrete antibodies.

For example, the monoclonal antibodies may be made using the hybridoma method first described by Kohler et al., 1975, Nature 256:495, or may be made by recombinant DNA methods (U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567).

In the hybridoma method, a mouse or other appropriate host animal, such as a hamster, is immunized as hereinabove described to elicit lymphocytes that produce or are capable of producing antibodies that will specifically bind to the protein used for immunization. Alternatively, lymphocytes may be immunized in vitro. Lymphocytes then are fused with myeloma cells using a suitable fusing agent, such as polyethylene glycol, to form a hybridoma cell (see, e.g., Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice, pp. 59-103 (Academic Press, 1986)).

The hybridoma cells thus prepared are seeded and grown in a suitable culture medium that preferably contains one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of the unfused, parental myeloma cells. For example, if the parental myeloma cells lack the enzyme hypoxanthine guanine phosphoribosyl transferase (HGPRT or HPRT), the culture medium for the hybridomas typically will include hypoxanthine, aminopterin, and thymidine (HAT medium), which substances prevent the growth of HGPRT-deficient cells.

Preferred myeloma cells are those that fuse efficiently, support stable high-level production of antibody by the selected antibody-producing cells, and are sensitive to a medium such as HAT medium. Among these, preferred myeloma cell lines are murine myeloma lines, such as those derived from MOPC-21 and MPC-11 mouse tumors available from the Salk Institute Cell Distribution Center, San Diego, Calif. USA, and SP-2 or X63-Ag8-653 cells available from the American Type Culture Collection, Rockville, Md. USA. Human myeloma and mouse-human heteromyeloma cell lines also have been described for the production of human monoclonal antibodies (see, e.g., Kozbor, 1984, J. Immunol. 133:3001; and Brodeur et al., Monoclonal Antibody Production Techniques and Applications, pp. 51-63 (Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 1987)).

Culture medium in which hybridoma cells are growing is assayed for production of monoclonal antibodies directed against the antigen. Preferably, the binding specificity of monoclonal antibodies produced by hybridoma cells is determined by immunoprecipitation or by an in vitro binding assay, such as radioimmunoassay (RIA) or enzyme-linked immunoabsorbent assay (ELISA). The binding affinity of the monoclonal antibody can, for example, be determined by the Scatchard analysis of Munson et al., 1980, Anal. Biochem. 107:220.

After hybridoma cells are identified that produce antibodies of the desired specificity, affinity, and/or activity, the clones may be subcloned by limiting dilution procedures and grown by standard methods (Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice, pp. 59-103 (Academic Press, 1986)). Suitable culture media for this purpose include, for example, D-MEM or RPMI-1640 medium. In addition, the hybridoma cells may be grown in vivo as ascites tumors in an animal.

The monoclonal antibodies secreted by the subclones are suitably separated from the culture medium, ascites fluid, or serum by conventional antibody purification procedures such as, for example, protein A-Sepharose, hydroxylapatite chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis, or affinity chromatography.

DNA encoding the monoclonal antibodies can be readily isolated and sequenced using conventional procedures (e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of murine antibodies). The hybridoma cells serve as a preferred source of such DNA. Once isolated, the DNA may be placed into expression vectors, which are then transfected into host cells such as E. coli cells, simian COS cells, Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cells, or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce antibody protein, to obtain the synthesis of monoclonal antibodies in the recombinant host cells. Review articles on recombinant expression in bacteria of DNA encoding the antibody include Skerra et al., 1993, Curr. Opinion in Immunol. 5:256-262 and Pluckthun, 1992, Immunol. Revs. 130:151-188.

In a further embodiment, monoclonal antibodies or antibody fragments can be isolated from antibody phage libraries generated using the techniques described in McCafferty et al., 1990, Nature 348:552-554. Clackson et al., 1991, Nature, 352:624-628 and Marks et al., 1991, J. Mol. Biol. 222:581-597 describe the isolation of murine and human antibodies, respectively, using phage libraries. Subsequent publications describe the production of high affinity (nM range) human antibodies by chain shuffling (Marks et al., 1992, Bio/Technology, 10:779-783), as well as combinatorial infection and in vivo recombination as a strategy for constructing very large phage libraries (see, e.g., Waterhouse et al., 1993, Nuc. Acids. Res., 21:2265-2266). Thus, these techniques are viable alternatives to traditional monoclonal antibody hybridoma techniques for isolation of monoclonal antibodies.

The DNA also may be modified, for example, by substituting the coding sequence for human heavy chain and light chain constant domains in place of the homologous murine sequences (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567; and Morrison et al., 1984, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81:6851), or by covalently joining to the immunoglobulin coding sequence all or part of the coding sequence for a non-immunoglobulin polypeptide.

Typically such non-immunoglobulin polypeptides are substituted for the constant domains of an antibody, or they are substituted for the variable domains of one antigen-combining site of an antibody to create a chimeric bivalent antibody comprising one antigen-combining site having specificity for an antigen and another antigen-combining site having specificity for a different antigen.

(3) Humanized Antibodies

A humanized antibody may have one or more amino acid residues introduced into it from a source which is non-human. These non-human amino acid residues are often referred to as “import” residues, which are typically taken from an “import” variable domain. Humanization can be essentially performed following the method of Winter and co-workers (see, e.g., Jones et al., 1986, Nature 321:522-525; Riechmann et al., 1988, Nature 332:323-327; Verhoeyen et al., 1988, Science 239:1534-1536), by substituting hypervariable region sequences for the corresponding sequences of a human antibody. Accordingly, such “humanized” antibodies are chimeric antibodies (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567) wherein substantially less than an intact human variable domain has been substituted by the corresponding sequence from a non-human species. In practice, humanized antibodies are typically human antibodies in which some hypervariable region residues and possibly some FR residues are substituted by residues from analogous sites in rodent antibodies.

The choice of human variable domains, both light and heavy, to be used in making the humanized antibodies is important to reduce antigenicity. According to the so-called “best-fit” method, the sequence of the variable domain of a rodent antibody is screened against the entire library of known human variable-domain sequences. The human sequence which is closest to that of the rodent is then accepted as the human framework region (FR) for the humanized antibody (Sims et al., 1993, J. Immunol 151:2296; Chothia et al., 1987, J. Mol. Biol. 196:901). Another method uses a particular framework region derived from the consensus sequence of all human antibodies of a particular subgroup of light or heavy chains. The same framework may be used for several different humanized antibodies (see, e.g., Carter et al., 1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 89:4285; Presta et al., 1993, J. Immunol. 151:2623).

In another embodiment, the antibodies may be humanized with retention of high affinity for the antigen and other favorable biological properties. Humanized antibodies may be prepared by a process of analysis of the parental sequences and various conceptual humanized products using three-dimensional models of the parental and humanized sequences. Three-dimensional immunoglobulin models are commonly available and are familiar to those skilled in the art. Computer programs are available which illustrate and display probable three-dimensional conformational structures of selected candidate immunoglobulin sequences. Inspection of these displays permits analysis of the likely role of the residues in the functioning of the candidate immunoglobulin sequence, i.e., the analysis of residues that influence the ability of the candidate immunoglobulin to bind its antigen. In this way, FR residues can be selected and combined from the recipient and import sequences so that the desired antibody characteristic, such as increased affinity for the target antigen(s), is achieved. In general, the hypervariable region residues are directly and most substantially involved in influencing antigen binding.

Various forms of the humanized antibody are contemplated. For example, the humanized antibody may be an antibody fragment, such as a Fab fragments, F(ab′)₂ fragments, Fv fragments, diabodies, triabodies, tetrabodies, single chain antibodies, scFv, scFv-Fc and the like. Alternatively, the humanized antibody may be an intact antibody, such as an intact IgG1 antibody.

(4) Human Antibodies

As an alternative to humanization, human antibodies can be generated. For example, it is now possible to produce transgenic animals (e.g., mice) that are capable, upon immunization, of producing a full repertoire of human antibodies in the absence of endogenous immunoglobulin production. For example, it has been described that the homozygous deletion of the antibody heavy-chain joining region (J_(H)) gene in chimeric and germ-line mutant mice results in complete inhibition of endogenous antibody production. Transfer of the human germ-line immunoglobulin gene array in such germ-line mutant mice will result in the production of human antibodies upon antigen challenge. See, e.g., Jakobovits et al., 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 90:2551; Jakobovits et al., 1993, Nature 362:255-258; Bruggermann et al., 1993, Year in Immuno. 7:33; and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,591,669, 5,589,369 and 5,545,807.

Alternatively, phage display technology (see, e.g., McCafferty et al., 1990, Nature 348:552-553) can be used to produce human antibodies and antibody fragments in vitro, from immunoglobulin variable (V) domain gene repertoires from unimmunized donors. According to this technique, antibody V domain genes are cloned in-frame into either a major or minor coat protein gene of a filamentous bacteriophage, such as M13 or fd, and displayed as functional antibody fragments on the surface of the phage particle. Because the filamentous particle contains a single-stranded DNA copy of the phage genome, selections based on the functional properties of the antibody also result in selection of the gene encoding the antibody exhibiting those properties. Thus, the phage mimics some of the properties of the B-cell. Phage display can be performed in a variety of formats; for their review see, e.g., Johnson and Chiswell, 1993, Current Opinion in Structural Biology 3:564-571. Several sources of V-gene segments can be used for phage display. Clackson et al., 1991, Nature 352:624-628 isolated a diverse array of anti-oxazolone antibodies from a small random combinatorial library of V genes derived from the spleens of immunized mice. A repertoire of V genes from unimmunized human donors can be constructed and antibodies to a diverse array of antigens (including self-antigens) can be isolated essentially following the techniques described by Marks et al., 1991, J. Mol. Biol. 222:581-597), or Griffith et al., 1993, EMBO J. 12:725-734. See also U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,565,332 and 5,573,905. As discussed above, human antibodies may also be generated by in vitro activated B cells (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,567,610 and 5,229,275). Human anti-CD30 antibodies are described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2004-0006215.

(5) Antibody Fragments

Various techniques have been developed for the production of antibody fragments. Traditionally, these fragments were derived via proteolytic digestion of intact antibodies (see, e.g., Morimoto et al., 1992, Journal of Biochemical and Biophysical Methods 24:107-117; and Brennan et al., 1985, Science 229:81). However, these fragments can now be produced directly by recombinant host cells. For example, the antibody fragments can be isolated from the antibody phage libraries discussed above. Alternatively, Fab′-SH fragments can be directly recovered from E. coli and chemically coupled to form F(ab′)₂ fragments (see, e.g., Carter et al., 1992, Bio/Technology 10:163-167). According to another approach, F(ab′)₂ fragments can be isolated directly from recombinant host cell culture. Other techniques for the production of antibody fragments will be apparent to the skilled practitioner. In other embodiments, the antibody of choice is a single chain Fv fragment (scFv). See WO 93/16185; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,571,894; and 5,587,458. The antibody fragment may also be a “linear antibody”, e.g., as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,641,870 for example. Such linear antibody fragments may be monospecific or bispecific.

(6) Bispecific Antibodies

Bispecific antibodies are antibodies that have binding specificities for at least two different epitopes. Exemplary bispecific antibodies may bind to two different epitopes of a target protein. Alternatively, an antibody arm may be combined with an arm which binds to a Fc receptors for IgG (FcγR), such as FcγRI (CD64), FcγRII (CD32) and FcγRIII (CD16) so as to focus cellular defense mechanisms to the target-expressing cell. Bispecific antibodies may also be used to localize cytotoxic agents to cells which express the target.

Traditional production of full length bispecific antibodies is based on the coexpression of two immunoglobulin heavy chain-light chain pairs, where the two chains have different specificities (see, e.g., Millstein et al., 1983, Nature 305:537-539). Because of the random assortment of immunoglobulin heavy and light chains, these hybridomas (quadromas) produce a potential mixture of 10 different antibody molecules, of which only one has the correct bispecific structure. Purification of the correct molecule, which is usually done by affinity chromatography steps, is rather cumbersome, and the product yields are low. Similar procedures are disclosed in WO 93/08829, and in Traunecker et al., 1991, EMBO J. 10:3655-3659. According to a different approach, antibody variable domains with the desired binding specificities (antibody-antigen combining sites) are fused to immunoglobulin constant domain sequences. The fusion preferably is with an immunoglobulin heavy chain constant domain, comprising at least part of the hinge, C_(H)2, and C_(H)3 regions. It is preferred to have the first heavy-chain constant region (C_(H)1) containing the site necessary for light chain binding, present in at least one of the fusions. DNAs encoding the immunoglobulin heavy chain fusions and, if desired, the immunoglobulin light chain, are inserted into separate expression vectors, and are co-transfected into a suitable host organism. This provides for great flexibility in adjusting the mutual proportions of the three polypeptide fragments in embodiments when unequal ratios of the three polypeptide chains used in the construction provide the optimum yields. It is, however, possible to insert the coding sequences for two or all three polypeptide chains in one expression vector when the expression of at least two polypeptide chains in equal ratios results in high yields or when the ratios are of no particular significance.

In one embodiment of this approach, the bispecific antibodies are composed of a hybrid immunoglobulin heavy chain with a first binding specificity in one arm, and a hybrid immunoglobulin heavy chain-light chain pair (providing a second binding specificity) in the other arm. It was found that this asymmetric structure facilitates the separation of the desired bispecific compound from unwanted immunoglobulin chain combinations, as the presence of an immunoglobulin light chain in only one half of the bispecific molecule provides for a facile way of separation. This approach is disclosed in WO 94/04690. For further details of generating bispecific antibodies see, for example, Suresh et al., 1986, Methods in Enzymology 121:210.

According to another approach described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,731,168, the interface between a pair of antibody molecules can be engineered to maximize the percentage of heterodimers which are recovered from recombinant cell culture. The preferred interface comprises at least a part of the C_(H)3 domain of an antibody constant domain. In this method, one or more small amino acid side chains from the interface of the first antibody molecule are replaced with larger side chains (e.g., tyrosine or tryptophan). Compensatory “cavities” of identical or similar size to the large side chain(s) are created on the interface of the second antibody molecule by replacing large amino acid side chains with smaller ones (e.g., alanine or threonine). This provides a mechanism for increasing the yield of the heterodimer over other unwanted end-products such as homodimers.

Techniques for generating bispecific antibodies from antibody fragments have also been described in the literature. For example, bispecific antibodies can be prepared using chemical linkage. Brennan et al., 1985, Science, 229: 81 describe a procedure wherein intact antibodies are proteolytically cleaved to generate F(ab′)₂ fragments. These fragments are reduced in the presence of the dithiol complexing agent sodium arsenite to stabilize vicinal dithiols and prevent intermolecular disulfide formation. The Fab′ fragments generated are then converted to thionitrobenzoate (TNB) derivatives. One of the Fab′-TNB derivatives is then reconverted to the Fab′-thiol by reduction with mercaptoethylamine and is mixed with an equimolar amount of the other Fab′-TNB derivative to form the bispecific antibody. The bispecific antibodies produced can be used as agents for the selective immobilization of enzymes.

Recent progress has facilitated the direct recovery of Fab′-SH fragments from E. coli, which can be chemically coupled to form bispecific antibodies. Shalaby et al., 1992, J. Exp. Med. 175: 217-225 describe the production of a fully humanized bispecific antibody F(ab′)₂ molecule. Each Fab′ fragment was separately secreted from E. coli and subjected to directed chemical coupling in vitro to form the bispecific antibody.

Various techniques for making and isolating bispecific antibody fragments directly from recombinant cell culture have also been described. For example, bispecific antibodies have been produced using leucine zippers. Kostelny et al., 1992, J. Immunol. 148(5):1547-1553. The leucine zipper peptides from the Fos and Jun proteins were linked to the Fab′ portions of two different antibodies by gene fusion. The antibody homodimers were reduced at the hinge region to form monomers and then re-oxidized to form the antibody heterodimers. This method can also be utilized for the production of antibody homodimers. The “diabody” technology described by Hollinger et al., 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:6444-6448 has provided an alternative mechanism for making bispecific antibody fragments. The fragments comprise a heavy-chain variable domain (V_(H)) connected to a light-chain variable domain (V_(L)) by a linker which is too short to allow pairing between the two domains on the same chain. Accordingly, the V_(H) and V_(L) domains of one fragment are forced to pair with the complementary V_(L) and V_(H) domains of another fragment, thereby forming two antigen-binding sites. Another strategy for making bispecific antibody fragments by the use of single-chain Fv (sFv) dimers has also been reported. See Gruber et al., 1994, J. Immunol. 152:5368.

Antibodies with more than two valencies are contemplated. For example, trispecific antibodies can be prepared. Tutt et al. J. Immunol 147: 60 (1991).

(7) Other Amino Acid Sequence Modifications

Amino acid sequence modification(s) of the antibodies described herein are contemplated. For example, it may be desirable to improve the binding affinity and/or other biological properties of the antibody. Amino acid sequence variants of the antibodies are prepared by introducing appropriate nucleotide changes into the antibody nucleic acid, or by peptide synthesis. Such modifications include, for example, deletions from, and/or insertions into and/or substitutions of, residues within the amino acid sequences of the antibody. Any combination of deletion, insertion, and substitution is made to arrive at the final construct, provided that the final construct possesses the desired characteristics. The amino acid changes also may alter post-translational processes of the antibody, such as changing the number or position of glycosylation sites.

A useful method for identification of certain residues or regions of the antibody that are favored locations for mutagenesis is called “alanine scanning mutagenesis” as described by Cunningham and Wells, 1989, Science, 244:1081-1085. Here, a residue or group of target residues are identified (e.g., charged residues such as arg, asp, his, lys, and glu) and replaced by a neutral or negatively charged amino acid (most preferably alanine or polyalanine) to affect the interaction of the amino acids with antigen. Those amino acid locations demonstrating functional sensitivity to the substitutions then are refined by introducing further or other variants at, or for, the sites of substitution. Thus, while the site for introducing an amino acid sequence variation is predetermined, the nature of the mutation per se need not be predetermined. For example, to analyze the performance of a mutation at a given site, ala scanning or random mutagenesis is conducted at the target codon or region and the expressed antibody variants are screened for the desired activity.

Amino acid sequence insertions include amino- and/or carboxyl-terminal fusions ranging in length from one residue to polypeptides containing a hundred or more residues, as well as intrasequence insertions of single or multiple amino acid residues. Examples of terminal insertions include an antibody with an N-terminal methionyl residue or the antibody fused to a cytotoxic polypeptide. Other insertional variants of the antibody molecule include the fusion to the N- or C-terminus of the antibody to an enzyme (e.g., for ADEPT) or a polypeptide which increases the serum half-life of the antibody.

Another type of variant is an amino acid substitution variant. These variants have at least one amino acid residue in the antibody molecule replaced by a different residue. The sites of greatest interest for substitutional mutagenesis include the hypervariable regions, but FR alterations are also contemplated.

Substantial modifications in the biological properties of the antibody are accomplished by selecting substitutions that differ significantly in their effect on maintaining (a) the structure of the polypeptide backbone in the area of the substitution, for example, as a sheet or helical conformation, (b) the charge or hydrophobicity of the molecule at the target site, or (c) the bulk of the side chain. Naturally-occurring residues can be divided into groups based on common side-chain properties:

-   -   (1) hydrophobic: norleucine, met, ala, val, leu, ile;     -   (2) neutral hydrophilic: cys, ser, thr;     -   (3) acidic: asp, glu;     -   (4) basic: asn, gln, his, lys, arg;     -   (5) residues that influence chain orientation: gly, pro; and     -   (6) aromatic: trp, tyr, phe.

Non-conservative substitutions will entail exchanging a member of one of these classes for another class.

A particularly preferred type of substitutional variant involves substituting one or more hypervariable region residues of a parent antibody (e.g., a humanized or human antibody). Generally, the resulting variant(s) selected for further development will have improved biological properties relative to the parent antibody from which they are generated. A convenient way for generating such substitutional variants involves affinity maturation using phage display. Briefly, several hypervariable region sites (e.g., 6-7 sites) are mutated to generate all possible amino substitutions at each site. The antibody variants thus generated are displayed in a monovalent fashion from filamentous phage particles as fusions to the gene III product of M13 packaged within each particle. The phage-displayed variants are then screened for their biological activity (e.g., binding affinity) as herein disclosed. In order to identify candidate hypervariable region sites for modification, alanine scanning mutagenesis can be performed to identify hypervariable region residues contributing significantly to antigen binding. Alternatively, or additionally, it may be beneficial to analyze a crystal structure of the antigen-antibody complex to identify contact points between the antibody and the antigen. Such contact residues and neighboring residues are candidates for substitution according to the techniques elaborated herein. Once such variants are generated, the panel of variants is subjected to screening as described herein and antibodies with superior properties in one or more relevant assays may be selected for further development.

It may be desirable to modify the antibody of the invention with respect to effector function, e.g., so as to enhance antigen-dependent cell-mediated cyotoxicity (ADCC) and/or complement dependent cytotoxicity (CDC) of the antibody. This may be achieved by introducing one or more amino acid substitutions in an Fc region of the antibody. Alternatively or additionally, cysteine residue(s) may be introduced in the Fc region, thereby allowing interchain disulfide bond formation in this region. The homodimeric antibody thus generated may have improved internalization capability and/or increased complement-mediated cell killing and antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity (ADCC). See Caron et al., 1992, J. Exp Med. 176:1191-1195 and Shopes, 1992, J. Immunol. 148:2918-2922. Homodimeric antibodies with enhanced anti-tumor activity may also be prepared using heterobifunctional cross-linkers as described in Wolff et al., 1993, Cancer Research 53:2560-2565. Alternatively, an antibody can be engineered which has dual Fc regions and may thereby have enhanced complement lysis and ADCC capabilities. See Stevenson et al., 1989, Anti-Cancer Drug Design 3:219-230.

To increase the serum half life of the antibody, one may incorporate a salvage receptor binding epitope into the antibody (especially an antibody fragment) as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,739,277, for example. As used herein, the term “salvage receptor binding epitope” refers to an epitope of the Fc region of an IgG molecule (e.g., IgG₁, IgG₂, IgG₃, or IgG₄) that is responsible for increasing the in vivo serum half-life of the IgG molecule.

(8) Glycosylation Variants

Antibodies in the ADC of the invention may be glycosylated at conserved positions in their constant regions (see, e.g., Jefferis and Lund, 1997, Chem. Immunol. 65:111-128; Wright and Morrison, 1997, TibTECH 15:26-32). The oligosaccharide side chains of the immunoglobulins affect the protein's function (see, e.g., Boyd et al., 1996, Mol. Immunol. 32:1311-1318; Wittwe and Howard, 1990, Biochem. 29:4175-4180), and the intramolecular interaction between portions of the glycoprotein which can affect the conformation and presented three-dimensional surface of the glycoprotein (Hefferis and Lund, supra; Wyss and Wagner, 1996, Current Opin. Biotech. 7:409-416). Oligosaccharides may also serve to target a given glycoprotein to certain molecules based upon specific recognition structures. For example, it has been reported that in agalactosylated IgG, the oligosaccharide moiety ‘flips’ out of the inter-C_(H)2 space and terminal N-acetylglucosamine residues become available to bind mannose binding protein (Malhotra et al., 1995, Nature Med. 1:237-243). Removal by glycopeptidase of the oligosaccharides from CAMPATH-1H (a recombinant humanized murine monoclonal IgG1 antibody which recognizes the CDw52 antigen of human lymphocytes) produced in Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cells resulted in a complete reduction in complement mediated lysis (CMCL) (Boyd et al., 1996, Mol. Immunol. 32:1311-1318), while selective removal of sialic acid residues using neuraminidase resulted in no loss of DMCL. Glycosylation of antibodies has also been reported to affect antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity (ADCC). In particular, CHO cells with tetracycline-regulated expression of β(1,4)-N-acetylglucosaminyltransferase III (GnTIII), a glycosyltransferase catalyzing formation of bisecting GlcNAc, was reported to have improved ADCC activity (Umana et al., 1999, Nature Biotech. 17:176-180).

Glycosylation of antibodies is typically either N-linked or O-linked. N-linked refers to the attachment of the carbohydrate moiety to the side chain of an asparagine residue. The tripeptide sequences asparagine-X-serine and asparagine-X-threonine, where X is any amino acid except proline, are the recognition sequences for enzymatic attachment of the carbohydrate moiety to the asparagine side chain. Thus, the presence of either of these tripeptide sequences in a polypeptide creates a potential glycosylation site. O-linked glycosylation refers to the attachment of one of the sugars N-aceylgalactosamine, galactose, or xylose to a hydroxyamino acid, most commonly serine or threonine, although 5-hydroxyproline or 5-hydroxylysine may also be used.

Glycosylation variants of antibodies are variants in which the glycosylation pattern of an antibody is altered. By altering is meant deleting one or more carbohydrate moieties found in the antibody, adding one or more carbohydrate moieties to the antibody, changing the composition of glycosylation (glycosylation pattern), the extent of glycosylation, etc.

Addition of glycosylation sites to the antibody is conveniently accomplished by altering the amino acid sequence such that it contains one or more of the above-described tripeptide sequences (for N-linked glycosylation sites). The alteration may also be made by the addition of, or substitution by, one or more serine or threonine residues to the sequence of the original antibody (for O-linked glycosylation sites). Similarly, removal of glycosylation sites can be accomplished by amino acid alteration within the native glycosylation sites of the antibody.

The amino acid sequence is usually altered by altering the underlying nucleic acid sequence. These methods include, but are not limited to, isolation from a natural source (in the case of naturally-occurring amino acid sequence variants) or preparation by oligonucleotide-mediated (or site-directed) mutagenesis, PCR mutagenesis, and cassette mutagenesis of an earlier prepared variant or a non-variant version of the antibody.

The glycosylation (including glycosylation pattern) of antibodies may also be altered without altering the amino acid sequence or the underlying nucleotide sequence. Glycosylation largely depends on the host cell used to express the antibody. Since the cell type used for expression of recombinant glycoproteins, e.g., antibodies, as potential therapeutics is rarely the native cell, significant variations in the glycosylation pattern of the antibodies can be expected. See, e.g., Hse et al., 1997, J. Biol. Chem. 272:9062-9070. In addition to the choice of host cells, factors which affect glycosylation during recombinant production of antibodies include growth mode, media formulation, culture density, oxygenation, pH, purification schemes and the like. Various methods have been proposed to alter the glycosylation pattern achieved in a particular host organism including introducing or overexpressing certain enzymes involved in oligosaccharide production (U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,047,335; 5,510,261; and 5,278,299). Glycosylation, or certain types of glycosylation, can be enzymatically removed from the glycoprotein, for example using endoglycosidase H (Endo H). In addition, the recombinant host cell can be genetically engineered, e.g., make defective in processing certain types of polysaccharides. These and similar techniques are well known in the art.

The glycosylation structure of antibodies can be readily analyzed by conventional techniques of carbohydrate analysis, including lectin chromatography, NMR, Mass spectrometry, HPLC, GPC, monosaccharide compositional analysis, sequential enzymatic digestion, and HPAEC-PAD, which uses high pH anion exchange chromatography to separate oligosaccharides based on charge. Methods for releasing oligosaccharides for analytical purposes are also known, and include, without limitation, enzymatic treatment (commonly performed using peptide-N-glycosidase F/endo-β-galactosidase), elimination using harsh alkaline environment to release mainly O-linked structures, and chemical methods using anhydrous hydrazine to release both N- and O-linked oligosaccharides.

B. Screening for Ligand-Linker-Drug Conjugates

Transgenic animals and cell lines are particularly useful in screening Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugates (e.g., antibody drug conjugates (ADC)) for prophylactic or therapeutic treatments of diseases or disorders involving overexpression of a target protein (e.g., CD20, CD30, CD33, CD40, CD70, BCMA, and Lewis Y). The screening of Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugates as ADCs is exemplified herein.

Transgenic animals and cell lines are particularly useful in screening antibody drug conjugates (ADC). Screening for a useful ADC may involve administering candidate ADC over a range of doses to the transgenic animal, and assaying at various time points for the effect(s) of the ADC on the disease or disorder being evaluated. Alternatively, or additionally, the drug can be administered prior to or simultaneously with exposure to an inducer of the disease, if applicable. Candidate ADC may be screened serially and individually, or in parallel under medium or high-throughput screening format. The rate at which ADC may be screened for utility for prophylactic or therapeutic treatments of diseases or disorders is limited only by the rate of synthesis or screening methodology, including detecting/measuring/analysis of data.

One embodiment is a screening method comprising (a) transplanting cells from a stable renal cell cancer cell line into a non-human animal, (b) administering an ADC drug candidate to the non-human animal and (c) determining the ability of the candidate to inhibit the formation of tumors from the transplanted cell line.

Another embodiment is a screening method comprising (a) contacting cells from a stable Hodgkin's disease cell line with an ADC drug candidate and (b) evaluating the ability of the ADC candidate to block ligand activation of CD40.

Another embodiment is a screening method comprising (a) contacting cells from a stable Hodgkin's disease cell line with an ADC drug candidate and (b) evaluating the ability of the ADC candidate to induce cell death. In one embodiment the ability of the ADC candidate to induce apoptosis is evaluated.

One embodiment is a screening method comprising (a) transplanting cells from a stable cancer cell line into a non-human animal, (b) administering an ADC drug candidate to the non-human animal and (c) determining the ability of the candidate to inhibit the formation of tumors from the transplanted cell line.

Another embodiment is a screening method comprising (a) contacting cells from a stable cancer cell line with an ADC drug candidate and (b) evaluating the ability of the ADC candidate to induce cell death. In one embodiment the ability of the ADC candidate to induce apoptosis is evaluated.

In one embodiment, candidate ADC are screened by being administered to the transgenic animal over a range of doses, and evaluating the animal's physiological response to the compounds over time. Administration may be oral, or by suitable injection, depending on the chemical nature of the compound being evaluated. In some cases, it may be appropriate to administer the compound in conjunction with co-factors that would enhance the efficacy of the compound. If cell lines derived from the subject transgenic animals are used to screen for compounds useful in treating various disorders, the test compounds are added to the cell culture medium at an appropriate time, and the cellular response to the compound is evaluated over time using the appropriate biochemical and/or histological assays. In some cases, it may be appropriate to apply the compound of interest to the culture medium in conjunction with co-factors that would enhance the efficacy of the compound.

Thus, provided herein are assays for identifying Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugates (such as ADCs) which specifically target and bind a target protein, the presence of which is correlated with abnormal cellular function, and in the pathogenesis of cellular proliferation and/or differentiation that is causally related to the development of tumors.

To identify growth inhibitory compounds that specifically target an antigen of interest, one may screen for compounds which inhibit the growth of cancer cells overexpressing antigen of interest derived from transgenic animals, the assay described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,677,171 can be performed. According to this assay, cancer cells overexpressing the antigen of interest are grown in a 1:1 mixture of F12 and DMEM medium supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, glutamine and penicillin streptomycin. The cells are plated at 20,000 cells in a 35 mm cell culture dish (2 mls/35 mm dish) and the test compound is added at various concentrations. After six days, the number of cells, compared to untreated cells is counted using an electronic COULTER™ cell counter. Those compounds which inhibit cell growth by about 20-100% or about 50-100% may be selected as growth inhibitory compounds.

To select for compounds which induce cell death, loss of membrane integrity as indicated by, e.g., PI, trypan blue or 7AAD uptake may be assessed relative to control. The PI uptake assay uses cells isolated from the tumor tissue of interest of a transgenic animal. According to this assay, the cells are cultured in Dulbecco's Modified Eagle Medium (D-MEM):Ham's F-12 (50:50) supplemented with 10% heat-inactivated FBS (Hyclone) and 2 mM L-glutamine. Thus, the assay is performed in the absence of complement and immune effector cells. The cells are seeded at a density of 3×10⁶ per dish in 100×20 mm dishes and allowed to attach overnight. The medium is then removed and replaced with fresh medium alone or medium containing various concentrations of the compound. The cells are incubated for a 3-day time period. Following each treatment, monolayers are washed with PBS and detached by trypsinization. Cells are then centrifuged at 1200 rpm for 5 minutes at 4° C., the pellet resuspended in 3 ml cold Ca²⁺ binding buffer (10 mM Hepes, pH 7.4, 140 mM NaCl, 2.5 mM CaCl₂) and aliquoted into 35 mm strainer-capped 12×75 mm tubes (1 ml per tube, 3 tubes per treatment group) for removal of cell clumps. Tubes then receive PI (10 μg/ml). Samples may be analyzed using a FACSCAN™ flow cytometer and FACSCONVERT™ CellQuest software (Becton Dickinson). Those compounds which induce statistically significant levels of cell death as determined by PI uptake may be selected as cell death-inducing compounds.

In order to select for compounds which induce apoptosis, an annexin binding assay using cells established from the tumor tissue of interest of the transgenic animal is performed. The cells are cultured and seeded in dishes as discussed in the preceding paragraph. The medium is then removed and replaced with fresh medium alone or medium containing 10 μg/ml of the antibody drug conjugate (ADC). Following a three-day incubation period, monolayers are washed with PBS and detached by trypsinization. Cells are then centrifuged, resuspended in Ca²⁺ binding buffer and aliquoted into tubes as discussed above for the cell death assay. Tubes then receive labeled annexin (e.g., annexin V-FITC) (1 μg/ml). Samples may be analyzed using a FACSCAN™ flow cytometer and FACSCONVERT™ CellQuest software (Becton Dickinson). Those compounds which induce statistically significant levels of annexin binding relative to control are selected as apoptosis-inducing compounds.

1. In Vitro Cell Proliferation Assays

Generally, the cytotoxic or cytostatic activity of a Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugate, such as an antibody drug conjugate (ADC), is measured by: exposing mammalian cells having receptor proteins to the antibody of the conjugate in a cell culture medium; culturing the cells for a period from about 6 hours to about 5 days; and measuring cell viability. Cell-based in vitro assays are used to measure viability (proliferation), cytotoxicity, and induction of apoptosis (caspase activation) of a Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugate. The screening of Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugates as ADCs is exemplified herein.

The in vitro potency of antibody drug conjugates is measured by a cell proliferation assay (see Examples). The CellTiter-Glo® Luminescent Cell Viability Assay is a commercially available (Promega Corp., Madison, Wis.), homogeneous assay method based on the recombinant expression of Coleoptera luciferase (U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,583,024; 5,674,713 and 5,700,670). This cell proliferation assay determines the number of viable cells in culture based on quantitation of the ATP present, an indicator of metabolically active cells (Crouch et al., 1993, J. Immunol. Meth. 160:81-88, U.S. Pat. No. 6,602,677). The CellTiter-Glo® Assay is conducted in 96 well format, making it amenable to automated high-throughput screening (HTS) (Cree et al. (1995) AntiCancer Drugs 6:398-404). The homogeneous assay procedure involves adding the single reagent (CellTiter-Glo® Reagent) directly to cells cultured in serum-supplemented medium. Cell washing, removal of medium and multiple pipetting steps are not required. The system detects as few as 15 cells/well in a 384-well format in 10 minutes after adding reagent and mixing. The cells may be treated continuously with ADC, or they may be treated and separated from ADC. Generally, cells treated briefly, i.e., 3 hours, show the same potency effects as continuously treated cells.

The homogeneous “add-mix-measure” format results in cell lysis and generation of a luminescent signal proportional to the amount of ATP present. The amount of ATP is directly proportional to the number of cells present in culture. The CellTiter-Glo® Assay generates a “glow-type” luminescent signal, produced by the luciferase reaction, which has a half-life generally greater than five hours, depending on cell type and medium used. Viable cells are reflected in relative luminescence units (RLU). The substrate, Beetle Luciferin, is oxidatively decarboxylated by recombinant firefly luciferase with concomitant conversion of ATP to AMP and generation of photons. The extended half-life eliminates the need to use reagent injectors and provides flexibility for continuous or batch mode processing of multiple plates. This cell proliferation assay can be used with various multiwell formats, e.g., 96 or 384 well format. Data can be recorded by luminometer or CCD camera imaging device. The luminescence output is presented as relative light units (RLU), measured over time.

The anti-proliferative effects of antibody drug conjugates can be measured by the cell proliferation, in vitro cell killing assay above against different breast tumor cell lines.

2. In Vivo Plasma Clearance and Stability

Pharmacokinetic plasma clearance and stability of Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugates, such as ADCs, can be investigated in rats and cynomolgus monkeys over time. The screening of Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugates as ADCs is exemplified herein.

3. Rodent Toxicity

Antibody drug conjugates and an ADC-minus control, “Vehicle”, are evaluated in an acute toxicity rat model. Toxicity of ADC is investigated by treatment of male and female Sprague-Dawley rats with the ADC and subsequent inspection and analysis of the effects on various organs. Gross observations include changes in body weights and signs of lesions and bleeding. Clinical pathology parameters (serum chemistry and hematology), histopathology, and necropsy are conducted on dosed animals. It is considered that weight loss, or weight change relative to animals dosed only with Vehicle, in animals after dosing with ADC is a gross and general indicator of systemic or localized toxicity.

Hepatotoxicity is measured by elevated liver enzymes, increased numbers of mitotic and apoptotic figures and hepatocyte necrosis. Hematolymphoid toxicity is observed by depletion of leukocytes, primarily granuloctyes (neutrophils), and/or platelets, and lymphoid organ involvement, i.e. atrophy or apoptotic activity. Toxicity is also noted by gastrointestinal tract lesions such as increased numbers of mitotic and apoptotic figures and degenerative enterocolitis.

Enzymes indicative of liver injury that are studied include:

AST (Aspartate Aminotransferase)

-   -   Localization: cytoplasmic; liver, heart, skeletal muscle, kidney     -   Liver:Plasma ratio of 7000:1     -   T1/2: 17 hrs         Alt (Alanine Aminotransferase)     -   Localization: cytoplasmic; liver, kidney, heart, skeletal muscle     -   Liver:Plasma ratio of 3000:1         -   T1/2: 42 hrs; diurnal variation         -   GGT (G-Glutamyl Transferase)         -   Localization: plasma membrane of cells with high secretory             or absorptive capacity; liver, kidney, intestine         -   Poor predictor of liver injury; commonly elevated in bile             duct disorders

4. Cynomolgus Monkey Toxicity/Safety

Similar to the rat toxicity/safety study, cynomolgus monkeys are treated with ADC followed by liver enzyme measurements, and inspection and analysis of the effects on various organs. Gross observations include changes in body weights and signs of lesions and bleeding. Clinical pathology parameters (serum chemistry and hematology), histopathology, and necropsy are conducted on dosed animals.

C. Synthesis of the Compounds

The Exemplary Compounds and Exemplary Conjugates can be made using the synthetic procedures outlined below in Schemes 5-16. As described in more detail below, the Exemplary Compounds or Exemplary Conjugates can be conveniently prepared using a Linker having a reactive site for binding to the Drug and Ligand. In one aspect, a Linker has a reactive site which has an electrophilic group that is reactive to a nucleophilic group present on a Ligand, such as but not limited to an antibody. Useful nucleophilic groups on an antibody include but are not limited to, sulfhydryl, hydroxyl and amino groups. The heteroatom of the nucleophilic group of an antibody is reactive to an electrophilic group on a Linker and forms a covalent bond to a Linker unit. Useful electrophilic groups include, but are not limited to, maleimide and haloacetamide groups. The electrophilic group provides a convenient site for antibody attachment.

In another embodiment, a Linker has a reactive site which has a nucleophilic group that is reactive to an electrophilic group present on an antibody. Useful electrophilic groups on an antibody include, but are not limited to, aldehyde and ketone carbonyl groups. The heteroatom of a nucleophilic group of a Linker can react with an electrophilic group on an antibody and form a covalent bond to an antibody unit. Useful nucleophilic groups on a Linker include, but are not limited to, hydrazide, oxime, amino, hydrazine, thiosemicarbazone, hydrazine carboxylate, and arylhydrazide. The electrophilic group on an antibody provides a convenient site for attachment to a Linker.

Carboxylic acid functional groups and chloroformate functional groups are also useful reactive sites for a Linker because they can react with secondary amino groups of a Drug to form an amide linkage. Also useful as a reactive site is a carbonate functional group on a Linker, such as but not limited to p-nitrophenyl carbonate, which can react with an amino group of a Drug, such as but not limited to N-methyl valine, to form a carbamate linkage. Typically, peptide-based Drugs can be prepared by forming a peptide bond between two or more amino acids and/or peptide fragments. Such peptide bonds can be prepared, for example, according to the liquid phase synthesis method (see Schröder and Lübke, “The Peptides”, volume 1, pp 76-136, 1965, Academic Press) that is well known in the field of peptide chemistry.

The synthesis of an illustrative Stretcher having an electrophilic maleimide group is illustrated below in Schemes 8-9. General synthetic methods useful for the synthesis of a Linker are described in Scheme 10. Scheme 11 shows the construction of a Linker unit having a val-cit group, an electrophilic maleimide group and a PAB self-immolative Spacer group. Scheme 12 depicts the synthesis of a Linker having a phe-lys group, an electrophilic maleimide group, with and without the PAB self-immolative Spacer group. Scheme 13 presents a general outline for the synthesis of a Drug-Linker Compound, while Scheme 14 presents an alternate route for preparing a Drug-Linker Compound. Scheme 15 depicts the synthesis of a branched linker containing a BHMS group. Scheme 16 outlines the attachment of an antibody to a Drug-Linker Compound to form a Drug-Linker-Antibody Conjugate, and Scheme 14 illustrates the synthesis of Drug-Linker-Antibody Conjugates having, for example but not limited to, 2 or 4 drugs per Antibody.

As described in more detail below, the Exemplary Conjugates are conveniently prepared using a Linker having two or more Reactive Sites for binding to the Drug and a Ligand. In one aspect, a Linker has a Reactive site which has an electrophilic group that is reactive to a nucleophilic group present on a Ligand, such as an antibody. Useful nucleophilic groups on an antibody include but are not limited to, sulfhydryl, hydroxyl and amino groups. The heteroatom of the nucleophilic group of an antibody is reactive to an electrophilic group on a Linker and forms a covalent bond to a Linker unit. Useful electrophilic groups include, but are not limited to, maleimide and haloacetamide groups. The electrophilic group provides a convenient site for antibody attachment.

In another embodiment, a Linker has a Reactive site which has a nucleophilic group that is reactive to an electrophilic group present on a Ligand, such as an antibody. Useful electrophilic groups on an antibody include, but are not limited to, aldehyde and ketone carbonyl groups. The heteroatom of a nucleophilic group of a Linker can react with an electrophilic group on an antibody and form a covalent bond to an antibody unit. Useful nucleophilic groups on a Linker include, but are not limited to, hydrazide, oxime, amino, hydrazine, thiosemicarbazone, hydrazine carboxylate, and arylhydrazide. The electrophilic group on an antibody provides a convenient site for attachment to a Linker.

In yet another embodiment a Drug containing aromatic arsine oxide can directly bind to a Ligand unit containing proximal dithiols to form stable arsine-dithiol cyclic structures.

1. Drug Moiety Synthesis

Typically, peptide-based Drugs can be prepared by forming a peptide bond between two or more amino acids and/or peptide fragments. Such peptide bonds can be prepared, for example, according to the liquid phase synthesis method (see E. Schröder and K. Lübke, “The Peptides”, volume 1, pp 76-136, 1965, Academic Press) that is well known in the field of peptide chemistry.

The auristatin/dolastatin drug moieties may be prepared according to the general methods of: U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,635,483; 5,780,588; Pettit et al., 1989, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 111:5463-5465; Pettit et al., 1998, Anti-Cancer Drug Design 13:243-277; and Pettit et al, 1996, J. Chem. Soc. Perkin Trans. 1 5:859-863.

In one embodiment, a Drug is prepared by combining about a stoichiometric equivalent of a dipeptide and a tripeptide, preferably in a one-pot reaction under suitable condensation conditions. This approach is illustrated in Schemes 5-7, below.

Scheme 5 illustrates the synthesis of an N-terminal tripeptide unit F which is a useful intermediate for the synthesis of the drug compounds of Formula Ib.

As illustrated in Scheme 5, a protected amino acid A (where PG represents an amine protecting group, R⁴ is selected from hydrogen, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹-alkyl-(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle, X¹-alkyl-(C₃-C₈ heterocycle) and R⁵ is selected from H and methyl; or R⁴ and R⁵ join, have the formula —(CR^(a)R^(b))_(n)—, wherein R^(a) and R^(b) are independently selected from hydrogen, C₁-C₈ alkyl and C₃-C₈ carbocycle and n is selected from 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, and form a ring with the carbon atom to which they are attached) is coupled to a t-butyl ester B (where R⁶ is selected from —H and —C₁-C₈ alkyl; and R⁷ is selected from hydrogen, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle)), wherein X¹ is a C₁₋₁₀ alkylene, under suitable coupling conditions, e.g., in the presence of PyBrop and diisopropylethylamine, or using DCC (see, e.g., Miyazaki et. al., 1995, Chem. Pharm. Bull. 43(10):1706-1718).

Suitable protecting groups PG, and suitable synthetic methods to protect an amino group with a protecting group are well known in the art. See, e.g., Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2nd Edition, 1991, John Wiley & Sons. Exemplary protected amino acids A are PG-Ile and, particularly, PG-Val, while other suitable protected amino acids include, without limitation: PG-cyclohexylglycine, PG-cyclohexylalanine, PG-aminocyclopropane-1-carboxylic acid, PG-aminoisobutyric acid, PG-phenylalanine, PG-phenylglycine, and PG-tert-butylglycine. Z is an exemplary protecting group. Fmoc is another exemplary protecting group. An exemplary t-butyl ester B is dolaisoleuine t-butyl ester.

The dipeptide C can be purified, e.g., using chromatography, and subsequently deprotected, e.g., using H₂ and 10% Pd—C in ethanol when PG is benzyloxycarbonyl, or using diethylamine for removal of an Fmoc protecting group. The resulting amine D readily forms a peptide bond with an amino acid BB (wherein R¹ is selected from —H, —C₁-C₈ alkyl and —C₃-C₈ carbocycle; and R² is selected from —H and —C₁-C₈ alkyl; or R¹ and R² join, have the formula —(CR^(a)R^(b))_(n)—, wherein R^(a) and R^(b) are independently selected from —H, —C₁-C₈ alkyl and —C₃-C₈ carbocycle and n is selected from 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, and form a ring with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached; and R³ is selected from hydrogen, C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₃-C₈ carbocycle, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -aryl, X¹-aryl, X¹—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), C₃-C₈ heterocycle and X¹—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle)). N,N-Dialkyl amino acids are exemplary amino acids for BB, such as commercially available N,N-dimethyl valine. Other N,N-dialkyl amino acids can be prepared by reductive bis-alkylation using known procedures (see, e.g., Bowman et al., 1950, J. Chem. Soc. 1342-1340). Fmoc-Me-L-Val and Fmoc-Me-L-glycine are two exemplary amino acids BB useful for the synthesis of N-monoalkyl derivatives. The amine D and the amino acid BB react to provide the tripeptide E using coupling reagent DEPC with triethylamine as the base. The C-terminus protecting group of E is subsequently deprotected using HCl to provide the tripeptide compound of formula F.

Illustrative DEPC coupling methodology and the PyBrop coupling methodology shown in Scheme 5 are outlined below in General Procedure A and General Procedure B, respectively. Illustrative methodology for the deprotection of a CBZ-protected amine via catalytic hydrogenation is outlined below in General Procedure C.

General Procedure A: Peptide Synthesis Using DEPC.

The N-protected or N,N-disubstituted amino acid or peptide D (1.0 eq.) and an amine BB (1.1 eq.) are diluted with an aprotic organic solvent, such as dichloromethane (0.1 to 0.5 M). An organic base such as triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine (1.5 eq.) is then added, followed by DEPC (1.1 eq.). The resulting solution is stirred, preferably under argon, for up to 12 hours while being monitored by HPLC or TLC. The solvent is removed in vacuo at room temperature, and the crude product is purified using, for example, HPLC or flash column chromatography (silica gel column). Relevant fractions are combined and concentrated in vacuo to afford tripeptide E which is dried under vacuum overnight.

General Procedure B: Peptide Synthesis Using PyBrop.

The amino acid B (1.0 eq.), optionally having a carboxyl protecting group, is diluted with an aprotic organic solvent such as dichloromethane or DME to provide a solution of a concentration between 0.5 and 1.0 mM, then diisopropylethylamine (1.5 eq.) is added. Fmoc- or CBZ-protected amino acid A (1.1 eq.) is added as a solid in one portion, then PyBrop (1.2 eq.) is added to the resulting mixture. The reaction is monitored by TLC or HPLC, followed by a workup procedure similar to that described in General Procedure A.

General Procedure C: Z-Removal Via Catalytic Hydrogenation.

CBZ-protected amino acid or peptide C is diluted with ethanol to provide a solution of a concentration between 0.5 and 1.0 mM in a suitable vessel, such as a thick-walled round bottom flask. 10% palladium on carbon is added (5-10% w/w) and the reaction mixture is placed under a hydrogen atmosphere. Reaction progress is monitored using HPLC and is generally complete within 1-2 h. The reaction mixture is filtered through a pre-washed pad of celite and the celite is again washed with a polar organic solvent, such as methanol after filtration. The eluent solution is concentrated in vacuo to afford a residue which is diluted with an organic solvent, preferably toluene. The organic solvent is then removed in vacuo to afford the deprotected amine C.

Scheme 6 shows a method useful for making a C-terminal dipeptide of formula K and a method for coupling the dipeptide of formula K with the tripeptide of formula F to make drug compounds of Formula Ib.

The dipeptide K can be readily prepared by condensation of the modified amino acid PG-Dolaproine G, with an amine of formula H using condensing agents well known for peptide chemistry, such as, for example, DEPC in the presence of triethylamine, as shown in Schemes 5 and 6. Suitable protecting groups are Boc (see, for example, Pettit et al., 1996, Synthesis 719-725) and Fmoc. Preparation of Fmoc-Dap is described in the Example 2.

The dipeptide of formula K can then be coupled with a tripeptide of formula F using General Procedure D to make the Fmoc-protected drug compounds of formula L which can be subsequently deprotected using General Procedure E in order to provide the drug compounds of formula (Ib).

General Procedure D: Drug Synthesis.

A mixture of dipeptide K (1.0 eq.) and tripeptide F (1 eq.) is diluted with an aprotic organic solvent, such as dichloromethane, to form a 0.1M solution, then a strong acid, such as trifluoroacetic acid (½ v/v) is added and the resulting mixture is stirred under a nitrogen atmosphere for two hours at 0° C. The reaction can be monitored using TLC or, preferably, HPLC. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the resulting residue is azeotropically dried twice, preferably using toluene. The resulting residue is dried under high vacuum for 12 h and then diluted with and aprotic organic solvent, such as dichloromethane. An organic base such as triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine (1.5 eq.) is then added, followed by either PyBrop (1.2 eq.) or DEPC (1.2 eq.) depending on the chemical functionality on the residue. The reaction mixture is monitored by either TLC or HPLC and upon completion, the reaction is subjected to a workup procedure similar or identical to that described in General Procedure A.

General Procedure E: Fmoc-Removal Using Diethylamine.

An Fmoc-protected Drug L is diluted with an aprotic organic solvent such as dichloromethane and to the resulting solution is added diethylamine (½ v/v). Reaction progress is monitored by TLC or HPLC and is typically complete within 2 h. The reaction mixture is concentrated in vacuo and the resulting residue is azeotropically dried, preferably using toluene, then dried under high vacuum to afford Drug Ib having a deprotected amino group. Thus, the above method is useful for making Drugs that can be used in the present invention.

2. Drug Linker Synthesis

To prepare a Drug-Linker Compound of the present invention, the Drug is reacted with a reactive site on the Linker. In general, the Linker can have the structure:

when both a Spacer unit (-Y-) and a Stretcher unit (-A-) are present. Alternately, the Linker can have the structure:

when the Spacer unit (-Y-) is absent.

The Linker can also have the structure:

when both the Stretcher unit (-A-) and the Spacer unit (-Y-) are absent.

The Linker can also have the structure:

when both the Amino Acid unit (W) and the Spacer Unit (Y) are absent.

In general, a suitable Linker has an Amino Acid unit linked to an optional Stretcher Unit and an optional Spacer Unit. Reactive Site 1 is present at the terminus of the Spacer and Reactive site 2 is present at the terminus of the Stretcher. If a Spacer unit is not present, then Reactive site 1 is present at the C-terminus of the Amino Acid unit.

In an exemplary embodiment, Reactive Site No. 1 is reactive to a nitrogen atom of the Drug, and Reactive Site No. 2 is reactive to a sulfhydryl group on the Ligand. Reactive Sites 1 and 2 can be reactive to different functional groups.

In another exemplary embodiment, Reactive Site No. 2 is reactive to amino groups of lysines on the Ligand.

In one aspect Reactive Site No. 1 is

In another aspect, Reactive Site No. 1 is

In still another aspect, Reactive Site No. 1 is a p-nitrophenyl carbonate having the formula

In one aspect of the invention, Reactive Site No. 2 is a thiol-accepting group. Suitable thiol-accepting groups include haloacetamide groups having the formula

wherein X represents a leaving group, preferably O-mesyl, O-tosyl, —Cl, —Br, or —I; or a maleimide group having the formula

Useful Linkers can be obtained via commercial sources, such as Molecular Biosciences Inc. (Boulder, Colo.), or prepared as summarized in Schemes 8-10 below.

wherein X is —CH₂— or —CH₂OCH₂—; and n is an integer ranging either from 0-10 when X is —CH₂—; or 1-10 when X is —CH₂OCH₂—.

The method shown in Scheme 9 combines maleimide with a glycol under Mitsunobu conditions to make a polyethylene glycol maleimide Stretcher (see for example, Walker, 1995, J. Org. Chem. 60:5352-5), followed by installation of a p-nitrophenyl carbonate Reactive Site group.

wherein E is —CH₂— or —CH₂OCH₂—; and e is an integer ranging from 0-8;

Alternatively, PEG-maleimide and PEG-haloacetamide stretchers can be prepared as described by Frisch, et al., 1996, Bioconjugate Chem. 7:180-186.

Scheme 10 illustrates a general synthesis of an illustrative Linker unit containing a maleimide Stretcher group and optionally a p-aminobenzyl ether self-immolative Spacer.

wherein Q is —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -halogen, -nitro or -cyano; m is an integer ranging from 0-4; and n is an integer ranging from 0-10.

Useful Stretchers may be incorporated into a Linker using the commercially available intermediates from Molecular Biosciences (Boulder, Colo.) described below by utilizing known techniques of organic synthesis.

Stretchers of formula (IIIa) can be introduced into a Linker by reacting the following intermediates with the N-terminus of an Amino Acid unit as depicted in Schemes 11 and 12 (infra):

-   -   where n is an integer ranging from 1-10 and T is —H or —SO₃Na;

-   -   where n is an integer ranging from 0-3;

Stretcher units of formula (IIIb) can be introduced into a Linker by reacting the following intermediates with the N-terminus of an Amino Acid unit:

-   -   where X is —Br or —I; and

Stretcher units of formula (IV) can be introduced into a Linker by reacting the following intermediates with the N-terminus of an Amino Acid unit:

Stretcher units of formula (Va) can be introduced into a Linker by reacting the following intermediates with the N-terminus of an Amino Acid unit:

Other useful Stretchers may be synthesized according to known procedures. Aminooxy Stretchers of the formula shown below can be prepared by treating alkyl halides with N-Boc-hydroxylamine according to procedures described in Jones et al., 2000, Tetrahedron Letters 41(10):1531-1533; and Gilon et al., 1967, Tetrahedron 23(11):4441-4447.

wherein —R¹⁷— is selected from —C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-, —C₃-C₈ carbocyclo-, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkylene)-, -arylene-, —C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-arylene-, -arylene-C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-, -C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-(C₃-C₈ carbocyclo)-, —(C₃-C₈ carbocyclo)-C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-, —C₃-C₈ heterocyclo-, —C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-(C₃-C₈ heterocyclo)-, —(C₃-C₈ heterocyclo)-C₁-C₁₀ alkylene-, —(CH₂CH₂O)_(r)—, —(CH₂CH₂O)_(r)—CH₂—; and r is an integer ranging from 1-10.

Isothiocyanate Stretchers of the formula shown below may be prepared from isothiocyanatocarboxylic acid chlorides as described in Angew. Chem. 87(14):517 (1975).

wherein —R¹⁷— is as described herein.

Scheme 11 shows a method for obtaining of a val-cit dipeptide Linker having a maleimide Stretcher and optionally a p-aminobenzyl self-immolative Spacer.

In the compounds shown in Scheme 11, the symbol Q is —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -halogen, -nitro or -cyano; and m is an integer ranging from 0-4.

Scheme 12 illustrates the synthesis of a phe-lys(Mtr) dipeptide Linker unit having a maleimide Stretcher unit and a p-aminobenzyl self-immolative Spacer unit. Starting material AD (lys(Mtr)) is commercially available (Bachem, Torrance, Calif.) or can be prepared according to Dubowchik et al, 1997, Tetrahedron Letters 38:5257-60.

In the compounds shown in Scheme 12, the symbol Q is —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -halogen, -nitro or -cyano; and m is an integer ranging from 0-4.

As shown in Scheme 13, a Linker can be reacted with an amino group of a Drug Compound of Formula (Ib) to form a Drug-Linker Compound that contains an amide or carbamate group, linking the Drug unit to the Linker unit. When Reactive Site No. 1 is a carboxylic acid group, as in Linker AJ, the coupling reaction can be performed using HATU or PyBrop and an appropriate amine base, resulting in a Drug-Linker Compound AK, containing an amide bond between the Drug unit and the Linker unit. When Reactive Site No. 1 is a carbonate, as in Linker AL, the Linker can be coupled to the Drug using HOBt in a mixture of DMF/pyridine to provide a Drug-Linker Compound AM, containing a carbamate bond between the Drug unit and the Linker unit.

Alternately, when Reactive Site No. 1 is a good leaving group, such as in Linker AN, the Linker can be coupled with an amine group of a Drug via a nucleophilic substitution process to provide a Drug-Linker Compound having an amine linkage (AO) between the Drug unit and the Linker unit.

Illustrative methods useful for linking a Drug to a Ligand to form a Drug-Linker Compound are depicted in Scheme 13 and are outlined in General Procedures G-H.

General Procedure G: Amide formation using HATU.

A Drug (Ib) (1.0 eq.) and an N-protected Linker containing a carboxylic acid Reactive site (1.0 eq.) are diluted with a suitable organic solvent, such as dichloromethane, and the resulting solution is treated with HATU (1.5 eq.) and an organic base, preferably pyridine (1.5 eq.). The reaction mixture is allowed to stir under an inert atmosphere, preferably argon, for 6 hours, during which time the reaction mixture is monitored using HPLC. The reaction mixture is concentrated and the resulting residue is purified using HPLC to yield the amide of formula AK.

General Procedure H: Carbamate Formation Using HOBt.

A mixture of a Linker AL having a p-nitrophenyl carbonate Reactive site (1.1 eq.) and Drug (Ib) (1.0 eq.) are diluted with an aprotic organic solvent, such as DMF, to provide a solution having a concentration of 50-100 mM, and the resulting solution is treated with HOBt (2.0 eq.) and placed under an inert atmosphere, preferably argon. The reaction mixture is allowed to stir for 15 min, then an organic base, such as pyridine (½ v/v), is added and the reaction progress is monitored using HPLC. The Linker is typically consumed within 16 h. The reaction mixture is then concentrated in vacuo and the resulting residue is purified using, for example, HPLC to yield the carbamate AM.

General Procedure I: Amide Bond Formation Between the Linker and the Drug.

A Linker containing carboxylic acid (30 mg), and anhydrous DMF (10 μl) are placed under an inert atmosphere, preferably argon, and cooled on dry ice for about 5 min. To this mixture oxalyl chloride (1 mL) was added dropwise by syringe. Typically, after few minutes, the mixture is allowed to warm up to room temperature and left for 30 min with occasional manual stirring. Volatiles are removed under reduced pressure. The residue is re-suspended in anhydrous CH₂Cl₂ (1 mL) and the solvent is removed in vacuo. The residue is dried at vacuum pump overnight to produce Linker AN.

The acylchloride AN is suspended in anhydrous CH₂Cl₂ (3 mL). The Drug Ib (0.006 mmol) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (4 μl, ˜4 eq.) are suspended in anhydrous CH₂Cl₂ (100 μl) and the mixtures is cooled on the ice bath typically for about 10 min. To this mixture, 150 μl of the acylchloride in CH₂Cl₂ (˜1.1 eq.) are added via syringe. After 15 min on ice, reaction mixture is allowed to warm up to room temperature and stirring continued for about 2 more hours. Reaction progress can be monitored by RP-HPLC. Solvent then is removed in vacuo. The residue is suspended in DMSO (0.5 mL). Water (100 μl) was added and after 0.5 h the mixture is purified, for example, using preparative HPLC to yield Drug-Linker AO.

General Procedure J: N-hydroxysuccinimide Ester Linker-Drug Preparation

Scheme 13a depictures example of preparation Linker-Drug Compounds AA2 containing N-hydroxysuccinimide esters via amide bond formation between the Drug and the Linker. This procedure is particularly useful for Drug molecules that do not contain free carboxylic group, or for the Drugs with the carboxylic group protected as acid labile esters, preferably a dimethoxybenzyl ester.

Drug (Ib) (1.0 eq.) and a suitable cyclic anhydride, preferably glutaric anhydride (1.0 eq.), are diluted with a suitable organic solvent, such as dichloromethane, and the resulting solution is treated with an organic base, preferably DIEA (3 eq.). The reaction mixture is allowed to stir under an inert atmosphere, preferably argon, for 24h, during which time the reaction mixture is monitored using HPLC. The reaction product AA1 is isolated using flash chromatography on silica gel. Vacuum dried material AA1 and N,N′-disuccinimidyl carbonate (3 eq.) are diluted with a suitable organic solvent, such as dichloromethane, and the resulting solution is treated with an organic base, preferably DIEA (3 eq.). The reaction mixture is allowed to stir under an inert atmosphere, preferably argon, for 24h, during which time the reaction mixture is monitored using HPLC. The reaction product AA2 is isolated using flash chromatography on silica gel. If necessary, the acid protecting group of the Drug-Linker AA2 can now be removed by the appropriate treatment, preferably with 1% TFA in dichloromethane for dimethoxybenzyl ester.

An alternate method of preparing Drug-Linker Compounds is outlined in Scheme 14. Using the method of Scheme 14, the Drug is attached to a partial Linker unit (ZA, for example), which does not have a Stretcher unit attached. This provides intermediate AP, which has an Amino Acid unit having an Fmoc-protected N-terminus. The Fmoc group is then removed and the resulting amine intermediate AQ is then attached to a Stretcher unit via a coupling reaction catalyzed using PyBrop or DEPC. The construction of Drug-Linker Compounds containing either a bromoacetamide Stretcher AR or a PEG maleimide Stretcher AS is illustrated in Scheme 14.

In the compounds shown in Scheme 14, the symbol Q is —C₁-C₈ alkyl, —O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl), -halogen, -nitro or -cyano; and m is an integer ranging from 0-4.

Application of this general strategy for preparation of lysines reactive N-hydroxysuccinimide ester Linker-Drug is depicted on Scheme 14a.

General Procedure K: Alternative Method of N-Hydroxysuccinimide Ester Linker-Drug Preparation

The intermediate AQ (1 eq.) is suspended in pyridine, and this mixture is added dropwise to the suspension of disuccinimidyl suberate (5 eq) in pyridine. The reaction mixture is then allowed to stir under an inert atmosphere, preferably argon, for about 4 h, during which time the reaction progress is monitored using HPLC. Pyridine is then removed in vacuo, the residue is suspended in a suitable organic solvent, such as dichloromethane, and the Drug-Linker AQ1 is isolated using flash chromatography on silica gel. If necessary, the acid protecting group of the Drug can now be removed by the appropriate treatment, preferably with 1% TFA in dichloromethane for dimethoxybenzyl ester.

Methodology useful for the preparation of a Linker unit containing a branched spacer is shown in Scheme 15.

Scheme 15 illustrates the synthesis of a val-cit dipeptide linker having a maleimide Stretcher unit and a bis(4-hydroxymethyl)styrene (BHMS) unit. The synthesis of the BHMS intermediate (AW) has been improved from previous procedures (see, e.g., International Publication No. WO 9813059 to Firestone et al., and Crozet et al., 1985, Tetrahedron Lett. 26:5133-5134) and utilizes as starting materials, commercially available diethyl (4-nitrobenzyl)phosphonate (AT) and commercially available 2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxan-5-one (AU). Linkers AY and BA can be prepared from intermediate AW using the methodology described in Scheme 9.

a) Dendritic Linkers

The linker may be a dendritic type linker for covalent attachment of more than one drug moiety through a branching, multifunctional linker moiety to a Ligand, such as but not limited to an antibody (see, e.g., Sun et al., 2002, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 12:2213-2215; Sun et al., 2003, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry 11:1761-1768). Dendritic linkers can increase the molar ratio of drug to antibody, i.e. loading, which is related to the potency of the Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugate. Thus, where a cysteine engineered antibody bears only one reactive cytsteine thiol group, a multitude of drug moieties may be attached through a dendritic linker.

Certain exemplary embodiments show a single one drug moiety conjugated to the Ligand unit or the Linker-Ligand unit. However, a skilled artisan would recognized further embodiments of the invention wherein one or more drugs moieties are attached to the same conjugate, i.e., wherein the integer p in formulae I, Ia, Ia′ and Ic from 1 to about 20. In certain embodiments, the integer p is from 1 to 8; in other embodiments from 2-8, in other embodiment, from 4-8 or in other embodiments form about 1-4.

The Following Exemplary Embodiments of Dendritic Linker Reagents Allow Up to Nine Nucleophilic Drug Moiety Reagents to be Conjugated by Reaction with the Chloroethyl Nitrogen Mustard Functional Groups:

3. Conjugation of Drug Moieties to Antibodies

Scheme 16 illustrates methodology useful for making Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugates having about 2 to about 4 drugs per antibody. An antibody is treated with a reducing agent, such as dithiothreitol (DTT) to reduce some or all of the cysteine disulfide residues to form highly nucleophilic cysteine thiol groups (—CH₂SH). The partially reduced antibody thus reacts with drug-linker compounds, or linker reagents, with electrophilic functional groups such as maleimide or α-halo carbonyl, according to the conjugation method at page 766 of Klussman et al, 2004, Bioconjugate Chemistry 15(4):765-773.

For example, an antibody, e.g., AC10, dissolved in 500 mM sodium borate and 500 mM sodium chloride at pH 8.0 is treated with an excess of 100 mM dithiothreitol (DTT). After incubation at 37° C. for about 30 minutes, the buffer is exchanged by elution over Sephadex G25 resin and eluted with PBS with 1 mM DTPA. The thiol/Ab value is checked by determining the reduced antibody concentration from the absorbance at 280 nm of the solution and the thiol concentration by reaction with DTNB (Aldrich, Milwaukee, Wis.) and determination of the absorbance at 412 nm. The reduced antibody is dissolved in PBS and is chilled on ice. The drug linker, e.g., MC-val-cit-PAB-MMAZ in DMSO, dissolved in acetonitrile and water at known concentration, is added to the chilled reduced antibody in PBS. After about one hour, an excess of maleimide is added to quench the reaction and cap any unreacted antibody thiol groups. The reaction mixture is concentrated by centrifugal ultrafiltration and the ADC, e.g., AC10-MC-vc-PAB-MMAZ, is purified and desalted by elution through G25 resin in PBS, filtered through 0.2 μm filters under sterile conditions, and frozen for storage.

A variety of antibody drug conjugates (ADC) can be prepared, with a variety of linkers, and the drug moieties, MMAZ, following the protocols of the Examples, and characterized by HPLC and drug loading assay.

D. Compositions and Methods of Administration

In other embodiments, compositions are provided that include an effective amount of an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or vehicle. For convenience, the Drug units and Drug-Linker Compounds can be referred to as Exemplary Compounds, while Drug-Ligand Conjugates and Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugates can be referred to as Exemplary Conjugates. The compositions are suitable for veterinary or human administration. The present compositions can include a pharmacological agent used in the treatment of a cancer, an autoimmune disease, an infectious disease or other condition or disorder.

The compositions can be in any form that allows for the composition to be administered to a patient. For example, the composition can be in the form of a solid, liquid or the like. Typical routes of administration include, without limitation, parenteral, oral, topical, sublingual, rectal, vaginal, ocular, intra-tumor, and intranasal. Parenteral administration includes subcutaneous injections, intravenous, intramuscular, intrasternal injection or infusion techniques. In one aspect, the compositions are administered parenterally. In yet another aspect, the Exemplary Compounds and/or the Exemplary Conjugates or compositions are administered intravenously.

Pharmaceutical compositions can be formulated so as to allow an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate to be bioavailable upon administration of the composition to a patient. Compositions can take the form of one or more dosage units, where for example, a tablet can be a single dosage unit, and a container of an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate can hold a plurality of dosage units.

Materials used in preparing the pharmaceutical compositions can be non-toxic in the amounts used. It will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art that the optimal dosage of the active ingredient(s) in the pharmaceutical composition will depend on a variety of factors. Relevant factors include, without limitation, the type of animal (e.g., human), the particular form of the Exemplary Compound or Exemplary Conjugate, the manner of administration, and the composition employed.

The pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or vehicle can be particulate, so that the compositions are, for example, in tablet or powder form. The carrier(s) can be liquid, with the compositions being, for example, an oral syrup or injectable liquid.

When intended for oral administration, the composition is preferably in solid or liquid form, where semi-solid, semi-liquid, suspension and gel forms are included within the forms considered herein as either solid or liquid.

As a solid composition for oral administration, the composition can be formulated into a powder, granule, compressed tablet, pill, capsule, chewing gum, wafer or the like form. Such a solid composition typically contains one or more inert diluents. In addition, one or more of the following can be present: binders such as carboxymethylcellulose, ethyl cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, or gelatin; excipients such as starch, lactose or dextrins, disintegrating agents such as alginic acid, sodium alginate, Primogel, corn starch and the like; lubricants such as magnesium stearate or Sterotex; glidants such as colloidal silicon dioxide; sweetening agents such as sucrose or saccharin, a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate or orange flavoring, and a coloring agent.

When the composition is in the form of a capsule, e.g., a gelatin capsule, it can contain, in addition to materials of the above type, a liquid carrier such as polyethylene glycol, cyclodextrin or a fatty oil.

The composition can be in the form of a liquid, e.g., an elixir, syrup, solution, emulsion or suspension. The liquid can be useful for oral administration or for delivery by injection. When intended for oral administration, a composition can comprise one or more of a sweetening agent, preservatives, dye/colorant and flavor enhancer. In a composition for administration by injection, one or more of a surfactant, preservative, wetting agent, dispersing agent, suspending agent, buffer, stabilizer and isotonic agent can also be included.

The liquid compositions, whether they are solutions, suspensions or other like form, can also include one or more of the following: sterile diluents such as water for injection, saline solution, preferably physiological saline, Ringer's solution, isotonic sodium chloride, fixed oils such as synthetic mono or digylcerides which can serve as the solvent or suspending medium, polyethylene glycols, glycerin, cyclodextrin, propylene glycol or other solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl paraben; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. A parenteral composition can be enclosed in ampoule, a disposable syringe or a multiple-dose vial made of glass, plastic or other material. Physiological saline is an exemplary adjuvant. An injectable composition is preferably sterile.

The amount of the Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate that is effective in the treatment of a particular disorder or condition will depend on the nature of the disorder or condition, and can be determined by standard clinical techniques. In addition, in vitro or in vivo assays can optionally be employed to help identify optimal dosage ranges. The precise dose to be employed in the compositions will also depend on the route of administration, and the seriousness of the disease or disorder, and should be decided according to the judgment of the practitioner and each patient's circumstances.

The compositions comprise an effective amount of an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate such that a suitable dosage will be obtained. Typically, this amount is at least about 0.01% of an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate by weight of the composition. When intended for oral administration, this amount can be varied to range from about 0.1% to about 80% by weight of the composition. In one aspect, oral compositions can comprise from about 4% to about 50% of the Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate by weight of the composition. In yet another aspect, present compositions are prepared so that a parenteral dosage unit contains from about 0.01% to about 2% by weight of the Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate.

For intravenous administration, the composition can comprise from about 0.01 to about 100 mg of an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate per kg of the animal's body weight. In one aspect, the composition can include from about 1 to about 100 mg of an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate per kg of the animal's body weight. In another aspect, the amount administered will be in the range from about 0.1 to about 25 mg/kg of body weight of the Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate.

Generally, the dosage of an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate administered to a patient is typically about 0.01 mg/kg to about 2000 mg/kg of the animal's body weight. In one aspect, the dosage administered to a patient is between about 0.01 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg of the animal's body weight, in another aspect, the dosage administered to a patient is between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 250 mg/kg of the animal's body weight, in yet another aspect, the dosage administered to a patient is between about 0.1 mg/kg and about 20 mg/kg of the animal's body weight, in yet another aspect the dosage administered is between about 0.1 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg of the animal's body weight, and in yet another aspect, the dosage administered is between about 1 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg of the animal's body weight.

In another aspect, the amount administered will be in the range from about 0.1 to about 20 mg/kg of body weight of the Exemplary Conjugate. In another aspect, the amount administered will be in the range from about 0.1 to about 15 mg/kg of body weight of the Exemplary Conjugate. In another aspect, the amount administered will be in the range from about 0.1 to about 10 mg/kg of body weight of the Exemplary Conjugate. In another aspect, the amount administered will be in the range from about 0.1 to about 5 mg/kg of body weight of the Exemplary Conjugate. In another aspect, the amount administered will be in the range from about 0.0.051 to about 2 mg/kg of body weight of the Exemplary Conjugate. In another aspect, the amount administered will be in the range from about 0.0.5 to about 1 mg/kg of body weight of the Exemplary Conjugate.

The Exemplary Compounds and/or Exemplary Conjugate or compositions can be administered by any convenient route, for example by infusion or bolus injection, by absorption through epithelial or mucocutaneous linings (e.g., oral mucosa, rectal and intestinal mucosa, etc.). Administration can be systemic or local. Various delivery systems are known, e.g., encapsulation in liposomes, microparticles, microcapsules, capsules, etc., and can be used to administer an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate or composition. In certain embodiments, more than one Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate or composition is administered to a patient.

In specific embodiments, it can be desirable to administer one or more Exemplary Compounds and/or Exemplary Conjugate or compositions locally to the area in need of treatment. This can be achieved, for example, and not by way of limitation, by local infusion during surgery; topical application, e.g., in conjunction with a wound dressing after surgery; by injection; by means of a catheter; by means of a suppository; or by means of an implant, the implant being of a porous, non-porous, or gelatinous material, including membranes, such as sialastic membranes, or fibers. In one embodiment, administration can be by direct injection at the site (or former site) of a cancer, tumor or neoplastic or pre-neoplastic tissue. In another embodiment, administration can be by direct injection at the site (or former site) of a manifestation of an autoimmune disease.

In certain embodiments, it can be desirable to introduce one or more Exemplary Compounds and/or Exemplary Conjugate or compositions into the central nervous system by any suitable route, including intraventricular and intrathecal injection. Intraventricular injection can be facilitated by an intraventricular catheter, for example, attached to a reservoir, such as an Ommaya reservoir.

In yet another embodiment, the Exemplary Compounds and/or Exemplary Conjugate or compositions can be delivered in a controlled release system, such as but not limited to, a pump or various polymeric materials can be used. In yet another embodiment, a controlled-release system can be placed in proximity of the target of the Exemplary Compounds and/or Exemplary Conjugate or compositions, e.g., the brain, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115-138 (1984)). Other controlled-release systems discussed in the review by Langer (Science 249:1527-1533 (1990)) can be used.

The term “carrier” refers to a diluent, adjuvant or excipient, with which an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate is administered. Such pharmaceutical carriers can be liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut oil, soybean oil, mineral oil, sesame oil and the like. The carriers can be saline, gum acacia, gelatin, starch paste, talc, keratin, colloidal silica, urea, and the like. Suitable carriers include buffering agents, such as amino acids and acetate salts, surfactants, such as polysorbates, polyols, and the like. In addition, auxiliary, stabilizing, thickening, lubricating and coloring agents can be used. In one embodiment, when administered to a patient, the Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate or compositions and pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are sterile. Water is an exemplary carrier when the Exemplary Compounds and/or Exemplary Conjugates are administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions. Suitable pharmaceutical carriers also include excipients such as starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like. The present compositions, if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents.

The present compositions can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, pellets, capsules, capsules containing liquids, powders, sustained-release formulations, suppositories, emulsions, aerosols, sprays, suspensions, or any other form suitable for use. Other examples of suitable pharmaceutical carriers are described in “Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences” by E. W. Martin.

In an embodiment, the Exemplary Compounds and/or Exemplary Conjugates are formulated in accordance with routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous administration to animals, particularly human beings. Typically, the carriers or vehicles for intravenous administration are sterile isotonic aqueous buffer solutions. Where necessary, the compositions can also include a solubilizing agent. Compositions for intravenous administration can optionally comprise a local anesthetic such as lignocaine to ease pain at the site of the injection. Generally, the ingredients are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent. Where an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate is to be administered by infusion, it can be dispensed, for example, with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline. Where the Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate is administered by injection, an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients can be mixed prior to administration.

Compositions for oral delivery can be in the form of tablets, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, granules, powders, emulsions, capsules, syrups, or elixirs, for example. Orally administered compositions can contain one or more optionally agents, for example, sweetening agents such as fructose, aspartame or saccharin; flavoring agents such as peppermint, oil of wintergreen, or cherry; coloring agents; and preserving agents, to provide a pharmaceutically palatable preparation. Moreover, where in tablet or pill form, the compositions can be coated to delay disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract thereby providing a sustained action over an extended period of time. Selectively permeable membranes surrounding an osmotically active driving compound are also suitable for orally administered compounds. In these later platforms, fluid from the environment surrounding the capsule is imbibed by the driving compound, which swells to displace the agent or agent composition through an aperture. These delivery platforms can provide an essentially zero order delivery profile as opposed to the spiked profiles of immediate release formulations. A time-delay material such as glycerol monostearate or glycerol stearate can also be used.

The compositions can be intended for topical administration, in which case the carrier may be in the form of a solution, emulsion, ointment or gel base. If intended for transdermal administration, the composition can be in the form of a transdermal patch or an iontophoresis device. Topical formulations can comprise a concentration of an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate of from about 0.05% to about 50% w/v (weight per unit volume of composition), in another aspect, from 0.1% to 10% w/v.

The composition can be intended for rectal administration, in the form, e.g., of a suppository which will melt in the rectum and release the Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate.

The composition can include various materials that modify the physical form of a solid or liquid dosage unit. For example, the composition can include materials that form a coating shell around the active ingredients. The materials that form the coating shell are typically inert, and can be selected from, for example, sugar, shellac, and other enteric coating agents. Alternatively, the active ingredients can be encased in a gelatin capsule.

E. Methods of Use for the Exemplary Conjugates

The Exemplary Compounds and/or Exemplary Conjugates are useful for treating cancer, an autoimmune disease, an infectious disease or other condition or disorder in a patient.

1. Treatment of Cancer

The Exemplary Compounds and/or Exemplary Conjugates are useful for inhibiting the multiplication of a tumor cell or cancer cell, causing apoptosis in a tumor or cancer cell, or for treating cancer in a patient. The Exemplary Compounds and/or Exemplary Conjugates can be used accordingly in a variety of settings for the treatment of animal cancers. The Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugates can be used to deliver a Drug or Drug unit to a tumor cell or cancer cell. Without being bound by theory, in one embodiment, the Ligand unit of an Exemplary Conjugate binds to or associates with a cancer-cell or a tumor-cell-associated antigen, and the Exemplary Conjugate can be taken up (internalized) inside a tumor cell or cancer cell through receptor-mediated endocytosis. The antigen can be attached to a tumor cell or cancer cell or can be an extracellular matrix protein associated with the tumor cell or cancer cell. Once inside the cell, one or more specific peptide sequences within the Linker unit are hydrolytically cleaved by one or more tumor-cell or cancer-cell-associated proteases, resulting in release of a Drug or a Drug-Linker Compound. The released Drug or Drug-Linker Compound is then free to migrate within the cell and induce cytotoxic or cytostatic activities. The Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugate also can be cleaved by intracellular protease to release the Drug moiety, the Drug-Linker compound, and/or an active fragment of the Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugate (e.g., cystyl-Linker-Drug). In an alternative embodiment, the Drug or Drug unit is cleaved from the Exemplary Conjugate outside the tumor cell or cancer cell, and the Drug or Drug-Linker Compound subsequently penetrates the cell. In an alternative embodiment, the Drug or Drug unit is cleaved from the Exemplary Conjugate outside the tumor cell or cancer cell, and the Drug or Drug-Linker Compound subsequently penetrates the cell.

In one embodiment, the Ligand unit binds to the tumor cell or cancer cell.

In another embodiment, the Ligand unit binds to a tumor cell or cancer cell antigen which is on the surface of the tumor cell or cancer cell.

In another embodiment, the Ligand unit binds to a tumor cell or cancer cell antigen which is an extracellular matrix protein associated with the tumor cell or cancer cell.

The specificity of the Ligand unit for a particular tumor cell or cancer cell can be important for determining those tumors or cancers that are most effectively treated. For example, Exemplary Conjugates having a BR96 Ligand unit can be useful for treating antigen positive carcinomas including those of the lung, breast, colon, ovaries, and pancreas. Exemplary Conjugates having an anti-CD30 or an anti-CD40 Ligand unit can be useful for treating hematologic malignancies.

Other particular types of cancers that can be treated with Exemplary Conjugates include, but are not limited to, those disclosed in Table 1:

TABLE 1 Solid tumors: including but not limited to fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, kidney cancer, pancreatic cancer, bone cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, esophogeal cancer, stomach cancer, oral cancer, nasal cancer, throat cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilms' tumor, cervical cancer, uterine cancer, testicular cancer, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, lung cancer, epithelial carcinoma, glioma, glioblastoma multiforme, astrocytoma, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma, hemangioblastoma, acoustic neuroma, oligodendroglioma, meningioma, skin cancer, melanoma, neuroblastoma, retinoblastoma Blood-borne cancers: including but not limited to acute lymphoblastic leukemia “ALL”, acute lymphoblastic B-cell leukemia, acute lymphoblastic T-cell leukemia, acute myeloblastic leukemia “AML”, acute promyelocytic leukemia “APL”, acute monoblastic leukemia, acute erythroleukemic leukemia, acute megakaryoblastic leukemia, acute myelomonocytic leukemia, acute nonlymphocyctic leukemia, acute undifferentiated leukemia, chronic myelocytic leukemia “CML”, chronic lymphocytic leukemia “CLL”, hairy cell leukemia, multiple myeloma Acute and chronic leukemias: including but not limited to lymphoblastic, myelogenous, lymphocytic, myelocytic leukemias Lymphomas: including but not limited to Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma, Multiple myeloma, Waldenström's macroglobulinemia, Heavy chain disease, Polycythemia vera

The Exemplary Conjugates provide conjugation-specific tumor or cancer targeting, thus reducing general toxicity of these compounds. The Linker units stabilize the Exemplary Conjugates in blood, yet are cleavable by tumor-specific proteases within the cell, liberating a Drug.

a) Multi-Modality Therapy for Cancer

Cancers, including, but not limited to, a tumor, metastasis, or other disease or disorder characterized by uncontrolled cell growth, can be treated or prevented by administration of an Exemplary Conjugate and/or an Exemplary Compound.

In other embodiments, methods for treating or preventing cancer are provided, including administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of an Exemplary Conjugate and a chemotherapeutic agent. In one embodiment the chemotherapeutic agent is that with which treatment of the cancer has not been found to be refractory. In another embodiment, the chemotherapeutic agent is that with which the treatment of cancer has been found to be refractory. The Exemplary Conjugates can be administered to a patient that has also undergone surgery as treatment for the cancer.

In some embodiment, the patient is also receives an additional treatment, such as radiation therapy. In a specific embodiment, the Exemplary Conjugate is administered concurrently with the chemotherapeutic agent or with radiation therapy. In another specific embodiment, the chemotherapeutic agent or radiation therapy is administered prior or subsequent to administration of an Exemplary Conjugates, in one aspect at least an hour, five hours, 12 hours, a day, a week, a month, in further aspects several months (e.g., up to three months), prior or subsequent to administration of an Exemplary Conjugate.

A chemotherapeutic agent can be administered over a series of sessions. Any one or a combination of the chemotherapeutic agents listed in Table 1 can be administered. With respect to radiation, any radiation therapy protocol can be used depending upon the type of cancer to be treated. For example, but not by way of limitation, x-ray radiation can be administered; in particular, high-energy megavoltage (radiation of greater that 1 MeV energy) can be used for deep tumors, and electron beam and orthovoltage x-ray radiation can be used for skin cancers. Gamma-ray emitting radioisotopes, such as radioactive isotopes of radium, cobalt and other elements, can also be administered.

Additionally, methods of treatment of cancer with an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate are provided as an alternative to chemotherapy or radiation therapy where the chemotherapy or the radiation therapy has proven or can prove too toxic, e.g., results in unacceptable or unbearable side effects, for the subject being treated. The animal being treated can, optionally, be treated with another cancer treatment such as surgery, radiation therapy or chemotherapy, depending on which treatment is found to be acceptable or bearable.

The Exemplary Compounds and/or Exemplary Conjugates can also be used in an in vitro or ex vivo fashion, such as for the treatment of certain cancers, including, but not limited to leukemias and lymphomas, such treatment involving autologous stem cell transplants. This can involve a multi-step process in which the animal's autologous hematopoietic stem cells are harvested and purged of all cancer cells, the animal's remaining bone-marrow cell population is then eradicated via the administration of a high dose of an Exemplary Compound and/or Exemplary Conjugate with or without accompanying high dose radiation therapy, and the stem cell graft is infused back into the animal. Supportive care is then provided while bone marrow function is restored and the animal recovers.

2. Multi-Drug Therapy for Cancer

Methods for treating cancer include administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of an Exemplary Conjugate and another therapeutic agent that is an anti-cancer agent. An “anti-cancer agent” or a “chemotherapeutic agent” is a chemical compound useful in the treatment of cancer.

Suitable anticancer agents include, but are not limited to, methotrexate, taxol, L-asparaginase, mercaptopurine, thioguanine, hydroxyurea, cytarabine, cyclophosphamide, ifosfamide, nitrosoureas, cisplatin, carboplatin, mitomycin, dacarbazine, procarbizine, topotecan, nitrogen mustards, cytoxan, etoposide, 5-fluorouracil, BCNU, irinotecan, camptothecins, bleomycin, doxorubicin, idarubicin, daunorubicin, dactinomycin, plicamycin, mitoxantrone, asparaginase, vinblastine, vincristine, vinorelbine, paclitaxel, and docetaxel.

Examples of chemotherapeutic agents include alkylating agents such as thiotepa and CYTOXAN® cyclosphosphamide; allyl sulfonates such as busulfan, improsulfan, piposulfan and treosulfan; aziridines such as benzodopa, carboquone, meturedopa, and uredopa; ethylenimines and methylamelamines including altretamine, triethylenemelamine, trietylenephosphoramide, triethiylenethiophosphoramide and trimethylolomelamine; TLK 286 (TELCYTA™); acetogenins (especially bullatacin and bullatacinone); delta-9-tetrahydrocannabinol (dronabinol, MARINOL®); beta-lapachone; lapachol; colchicines; betulinic acid; a camptothecin (including the synthetic analogue topotecan (HYCAMTIN®), CPT-11 (irinotecan, CAMPTOSAR®), acetylcamptothecin, scopolectin, crisnatol; and 9-aminocamptothecin); bryostatin; callystatin; CC-1065 (including its adozelesin, carzelesin and bizelesin synthetic analogues); podophyllotoxin; podophyllinic acid; teniposide; cryptophycins (particularly cryptophycin 1 and cryptophycin 8); dolastatin; duocarmycin (including the synthetic analogues, KW-2189 and CB1-TM1); eleutherobin; pancratistatin; a sarcodictyin; spongistatin; nitrogen mustards such as chlorambucil, chilomaphazine, cholophosphamide, estramustine, ifosfamide, mechlorethamine, mechlorethamine oxide hydrochloride, melphalan, novembichin, phenesterine, prednimustine, trofosfamide, and uracil mustard; nitrosureas such as carmustine (BCNU), chlorozotocin, fotemustine, lomustine, nimustine, and ranimnustine; triazines, such as dacarbazine; bisphosphonates, such as clodronate; antibiotics such as the enediyne antibiotics (e.g., calicheamicin, especially calicheamicin gamma1I and calicheamicin omegaI1 (see, e.g., Agnew, 1994, Chem. Intl. Ed. Engl. 33:183-186) and anthracyclines such as annamycin, AD 32, alcarubicin, daunorubicin, dexrazoxane, DX-52-1, epirubicin, GPX-100, idarubicin, pirarubicin, zorubicin, mtoxantrone, KRN5500, menogaril, dynemicin, including dynemicin A, an esperamicin, neocarzinostatin chromophore and related chromoprotein enediyne antibiotic chromophores, aclacinomysins, actinomycin, authramycin, azaserine, bleomycins (e.g., A2 or B2), cactinomycin, carabicin, caminomycin, carzinophilin, chromomycinis, dactinomycin, detorubicin, 6-diazo-5-oxo-L-norleucine, ADRIAMYCIN® doxorubicin (including morpholino-doxorubicin, cyanomorpholino-doxorubicin, 2-pyrrolino-doxorubicin, liposomal doxorubicin, and deoxydoxorubicin), EICAR, esorubicin, marcellomycin, mitomycins such as mitomycin C, mycophenolic acid, nogalamycin, olivomycins, peplomycin, potfiromycin, puromycin, quelamycin, ribavirin, rodorubicin, streptonigrin, streptozocin, tiazofurin, tubercidin, ubenimex, zinostatin, and zorubicin; folic acid analogues such as denopterin, pteropterin, and trimetrexate; purine analogs such as fludarabine, 6-mercaptopurine, thiamiprine, and thioguanine; pyrimidine analogs such as ancitabine, azacitidine, 6-azauridine, carmofur, cytarabine, cytoarabinoside, dideoxyuridine, doxifluridine, enocitabine, floxuridine and fludarabine; androgens such as calusterone, dromostanolone propionate, epitiostanol, mepitiostane, and testolactone; anti-adrenals such as aminoglutethimide, mitotane, and trilostane; folic acid replenisher such as folinic acid (leucovorin); aceglatone; anti-folate anti-neoplastic agents such as ALIMTA®, LY231514 pemetrexed, dihydrofolate reductase inhibitors such as methotrexate and trimetrexate, anti-metabolites such as 5-fluorouracil (5-FU) and its prodrugs such as UFT, S-1 and capecitabine, and thymidylate synthase inhibitors and glycinamide ribonucleotide formyltransferase inhibitors such as raltitrexed (TOMUDEX®, TDX); inhibitors of dihydropyrimidine dehydrogenase such as eniluracil; aldophosphamide glycoside; aminolevulinic acid; amsacrine; bestrabucil; bisantrene; edatraxate; defofamine; demecolcine; diaziquone; elfornithine; elliptinium acetate; an epothilone; etoglucid; gallium nitrate; hydroxyurea; defereoxamine; lentinan; lonidainine; maytansinoids such as maytansine and ansamitocins; mitoguazone; mitoxantrone; mopidanmol; nitraerine; pentostatin; phenamet; pirarubicin; losoxantrone; 2-ethylhydrazide; procarbazine; PSK® polysaccharide complex (JHS Natural Products, Eugene, Oreg.); razoxane; rhizoxin; sizofuran; spirogermanium; tenuazonic acid; triaziquone; 2,2′,2″-trichlorotriethylamine; trichothecenes (especially T-2 toxin, verracurin A, roridin A and anguidine); urethan; vindesine (ELDISINE®, FILDESIN®); dacarbazine; mannomustine; mitobronitol; mitolactol; pipobroman; gacytosine; arabinoside (“Ara-C”); cyclophosphamide; thiotepa; taxoids and taxanes, e.g., TAXOL® paclitaxel (Bristol-Myers Squibb Oncology, Princeton, N.J.), ABRAXANE™ Cremophor-free, albumin-engineered nanoparticle formulation of paclitaxel (American Pharmaceutical Partners, Schaumberg, Ill.), and TAXOTERE® doxetaxel (Rhône-Poulenc Rorer, Antony, France); chloranbucil; gemcitabine (GEMZAR®); 6-thioguanine; mercaptopurine; platinum; platinum analogs or platinum-based analogs such as cisplatin, oxaliplatin and carboplatin; vinblastine (VELBAN®); etoposide (VP-16); ifosfamide; mitoxantrone; vincristine (ONCOVIN®); vinblastine; vindesine; vinorelbine; vinca alkaloid; vinorelbine (NAVELBINE®); novantrone; edatrexate; daunomycin; aminopterin; xeloda; ibandronate; topoisomerase inhibitor RFS 2000; difluoromethylomithine (DMFO); MDR inhibitors such as verapamil; retinoids such as retinoic acid; cell cycle inhibitors, such as staurosporine; Lovastatin; REVLIMID (lenalidomide); THALAMID (thalidomide); VELADE (bortezomib); pharmaceutically acceptable salts, acids or derivatives of any of the above; as well as combinations of two or more of the above such as CHOP, an abbreviation for a combined therapy of cyclophosphamide, doxorubicin, vincristine, and prednisolone, and FOLFOX, an abbreviation for a treatment regimen with oxaliplatin (ELOXATIN™) combined with 5-FU and leucovorin.

Also included in this definition are anti-hormonal agents that act to regulate or inhibit hormone action on tumors such as anti-estrogens and selective estrogen receptor modulators (SERMs), including, for example, tamoxifen (including NOLVADEX® tamoxifen), raloxifene, droloxifene, 4-hydroxytamoxifen, trioxifene, keoxifene, LY117018, onapristone, and FARESTON® toremifene; aromatase inhibitors that inhibit the enzyme aromatase, which regulates estrogen production in the adrenal glands, such as, for example, 4(5)-imidazoles, aminoglutethimide, megestrol, MEGASE® megestrol acetate, AROMASIN® exemestane, formestanie, fadrozole, RIVISOR® vorozole, FEMARA® letrozole, and ARIMIDEX® anastrozole; and anti-androgens such as flutamide, nilutamide, bicalutamide, leuprolide (e.g., leuprolide acetate), and goserelin; as well as troxacitabine (a 1,3-dioxolane nucleoside cytosine analog); antisense oligonucleotides, particularly those that inhibit expression of genes in signaling pathways implicated in abherant cell proliferation, such as, for example, PKC-alpha, Raf, H-Ras, and epidermal growth factor receptor (EGF-R); vaccines such as gene therapy vaccines, for example, ALLOVECTIN® vaccine, LEUVECTIN® vaccine, and VAXID® vaccine; PROLEUKIN® rIL-2; LURTOTECAN® topoisomerase 1 inhibitor; ABARELIX® rmRH; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, acids or derivatives of any of the above.

Also included in this definition are Vitamin D3 analogs, such as EB 1089, CB 1093 and KH 1060; and Photodynamic therapies, such as vertoporfin (BPD-MA), phthalocyanine, photosensitizer Pc4, demethoxy-hypocrellin A and 2BA-2-DMHA.

3. Treatment of Autoimmune Diseases

The Exemplary Conjugates are useful for killing or inhibiting the replication of a cell that produces an autoimmune disease or for treating an autoimmune disease. The Exemplary Conjugates can be used accordingly in a variety of settings for the treatment of an autoimmune disease in a patient. The Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugates can be used to deliver a Drug to a target cell. Without being bound by theory, in one embodiment, the Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugate associates with an antigen on the surface of a target cell, and the Exemplary Conjugate is then taken up inside a target-cell through receptor-mediated endocytosis. Once inside the cell, one or more specific peptide sequences within the Linker unit are enzymatically or hydrolytically cleaved, resulting in release of a Drug. The released Drug is then free to migrate in the cytosol and induce cytotoxic or cytostatic activities. The Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugate also can be cleaved by intracellular protease to release the Drug moiety, the Drug-Linker compound, and/or an active fragment of the Drug-Linker-Ligand conjugate (e.g., cystyl-Linker-Drug). In an alternative embodiment, the Drug is cleaved from the Exemplary Conjugate outside the target cell, and the Drug subsequently penetrates the cell.

In one embodiment, the Ligand unit binds to an autoimmune antigen. In one aspect, the antigen is on the surface of a cell involved in an autoimmune condition.

In another embodiment, the Ligand unit binds to an autoimmune antigen which is on the surface of a cell.

In one embodiment, the Ligand binds to activated lymphocytes that are associated with the autoimmune disease state.

In a further embodiment, the Exemplary Conjugates kill or inhibit the multiplication of cells that produce an autoimmune antibody associated with a particular autoimmune disease.

Particular types of autoimmune diseases that can be treated with the Exemplary Conjugates include, but are not limited to, Th2 lymphocyte related disorders (e.g., atopic dermatitis, atopic asthma, rhinoconjunctivitis, allergic rhinitis, Omenn's syndrome, systemic sclerosis, and graft versus host disease); Th1 lymphocyte-related disorders (e.g., rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, psoriasis, Sjorgren's syndrome, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, Grave's disease, primary biliary cirrhosis, Wegener's granulomatosis, and tuberculosis); activated B lymphocyte-related disorders (e.g., systemic lupus erythematosus, Goodpasture's syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, and type I diabetes); and those disclosed in Table 3.

TABLE 3 Auto Immune Diseases Active Chronic Hepatitis, Addison's Disease, Allergic Alveolitis, Allergic Reaction, Allergic Rhinitis, Alport's Syndrome, Anaphlaxis, Ankylosing Spondylitis, Anti-phosholipid Syndrome, Arthritis, Ascariasis, Aspergillosis, Atopic Allergy, Atropic Dermatitis, Atropic Rhinitis, Behcet's Disease, Bird-Fancier's Lung, Bronchial Asthma, Caplan's Syndrome, Cardiomyopathy, Celiac Disease, Chagas' Disease, Chronic Glomerulonephritis, Cogan's Syndrome, Cold Agglutinin Disease, Congenital Rubella Infection, CREST Syndrome, Crohn's Disease, Cryoglobulinemia, Cushing's Syndrome, Dermatomyositis, Discoid Lupus, Dressler's Syndrome, Eaton-Lambert Syndrome, Echovirus Infection, Encephalomyelitis, Endocrine opthalmopathy, Epstein-Barr Virus Infection, Equine Heaves, Erythematosis, Evan's Syndrome, Felty's Syndrome, Fibromyalgia, Fuch's Cyclitis, Gastric Atrophy, Gastrointestinal Allergy, Giant Cell Arteritis, Glomerulonephritis, Goodpasture's Syndrome, Graft v. Host Disease, Graves' Disease, Guillain-Barre Disease, Hashimoto's Thyroiditis, Hemolytic Anemia, Henoch-Schonlein Purpura, Idiopathic Adrenal Atrophy, Idiopathic Pulmonary Fibritis, IgA Nephropathy, Inflammatory Bowel Diseases, Insulin-dependent Diabetes Mellitus, Juvenile Arthritis, Juvenile Diabetes Mellitus (Type I), Lambert-Eaton Syndrome, Laminitis, Lichen Planus, Lupoid Hepatitis, Lupus, Lymphopenia, Meniere's Disease, Mixed Connective Tissue Disease, Multiple Sclerosis, Myasthenia Gravis, Pernicious Anemia, Polyglandular Syndromes, Presenile Dementia, Primary Agammaglobulinemia, Primary Biliary Cirrhosis, Psoriasis, Psoriatic Arthritis, Raynauds Phenomenon, Recurrent Abortion, Reiter's Syndrome, Rheumatic Fever, Rheumatoid Arthritis, Sampter's Syndrome, Schistosomiasis, Schmidt's Syndrome, Scleroderma, Shulman's Syndrome, Sjorgen's Syndrome, Stiff-Man Syndrome, Sympathetic Ophthalmia, Systemic Lupus Erythematosis, Takayasu's Arteritis, Temporal Arteritis, Thyroiditis, Thrombocytopenia, Thyrotoxicosis, Toxic Epidermal Necrolysis, Type B Insulin Resistance, Type I Diabetes Mellitus, Ulcerative Colitis, Uveitis, Vitiligo, Waldenstrom's Macroglobulemia, Wegener's Granulomatosis

a) Multi-Drug Therapy of Autoimmune Diseases

Methods for treating an autoimmune disease are also disclosed including administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of an Exemplary Conjugate and another therapeutic agent known for the treatment of an autoimmune disease. In one embodiment, the anti-autoimmune disease agent includes, but is not limited to, agents listed in Table 4.

TABLE 4 cyclosporine, cyclosporine A, mycophenylate mofetil, sirolimus, tacrolimus, enanercept, prednisone, azathioprine, methotrexate, cyclophosphamide, prednisone, aminocaproic acid, chloroquine, hydroxychloroquine, hydrocortisone, dexamethasone, chlorambucil, DHEA, danazol, bromocriptine, meloxicam, infliximab

4. Treatment of Infectious Diseases

The Exemplary Conjugates are useful for killing or inhibiting the multiplication of a cell that produces an infectious disease or for treating an infectious disease. The Exemplary Conjugates can be used accordingly in a variety of settings for the treatment of an infectious disease in a patient. The Drug-Linker-Ligand Conjugates can be used to deliver a Drug to a target cell. In one embodiment, the Ligand unit binds to the infectious disease cell.

In one embodiment, the Conjugates kill or inhibit the multiplication of cells that produce a particular infectious disease.

Particular types of infectious diseases that can be treated with the Exemplary Conjugates include, but are not limited to, those disclosed in Table 5.

TABLE 5 Bacterial Diseases: Diphtheria, Pertussis, Occult Bacteremia, Urinary Tract Infection, Gastroenteritis, Cellulitis, Epiglottitis, Tracheitis, Adenoid Hypertrophy, Retropharyngeal Abcess, Impetigo, Ecthyma, Pneumonia, Endocarditis, Septic Arthritis, Pneumococca, Peritonitis, Bactermia, Meningitis, Acute Purulent Meningitis, Urethritis, Cervicitis, Proctitis, Pharyngitis, Salpingitis, Epididymitis, Gonorrhea, Syphilis, Listeriosis, Anthrax, Nocardiosis, Salmonella, Typhoid Fever, Dysentery, Conjunctivitis, Sinusitis, Brucellosis, Tullaremia, Cholera, Bubonic Plague, Tetanus, Necrotizing Enteritis, Actinomycosis, Mixed Anaerobic Infections, Syphilis, Relapsing Fever, Leptospirosis, Lyme Disease, Rat Bite Fever, Tuberculosis, Lymphadenitis, Leprosy, Chlamydia, Chlamydial Pneumonia, Trachoma, Inclusion Conjunctivitis Systemic Fungal Diseases: Histoplamosis, Coccidiodomycosis, Blastomycosis, Sporotrichosis, Cryptococcsis, Systemic Candidiasis, Aspergillosis, Mucormycosis, Mycetoma, Chromomycosis Rickettsial Diseases: Typhus, Rocky Mountain Spotted Fever, Ehrlichiosis, Eastern Tick-Borne Rickettsioses, Rickettsialpox, Q Fever, Bartonellosis Parasitic Diseases: Malaria, Babesiosis, African Sleeping Sickness, Chagas' Disease, Leishmaniasis, Dum-Dum Fever, Toxoplasmosis, Meningoencephalitis, Keratitis, Entamebiasis, Giardiasis, Cryptosporidiasis, Isosporiasis, Cyclosporiasis, Microsporidiosis, Ascariasis, Whipworm Infection, Hookworm Infection, Threadworm Infection, Ocular Larva Migrans, Trichinosis, Guinea Worm Disease, Lymphatic Filariasis, Loiasis, River Blindness, Canine Heartworm Infection, Schistosomiasis, Swimmer's Itch, Oriental Lung Fluke, Oriental Liver Fluke, Fascioliasis, Fasciolopsiasis, Opisthorchiasis, Tapeworm Infections, Hydatid Disease, Alveolar Hydatid Disease Viral Diseases: Measles, Subacute sclerosing panencephalitis, Common Cold, Mumps, Rubella, Roseola, Fifth Disease, Chickenpox, Respiratory syncytial virus infection, Croup, Bronchiolitis, Infectious Mononucleosis, Poliomyelitis, Herpangina, Hand-Foot-and-Mouth Disease, Bornholm Disease, Genital Herpes, Genital Warts, Aseptic Meningitis, Myocarditis, Pericarditis, Gastroenteritis, Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome (AIDS) , Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV), Reye's Syndrome, Kawasaki Syndrome, Influenza, Bronchitis, Viral “Walking” Pneumonia, Acute Febrile Respiratory Disease, Acute pharyngoconjunctival fever, Epidemic keratoconjunctivitis, Herpes Simplex Virus 1 (HSV-1) , Herpes Simplex Virus 2 (HSV-2), Shingles, Cytomegalic Inclusion Disease, Rabies, Progressive Multifocal Leukoencephalopathy, Kuru, Fatal Familial Insomnia, Creutzfeldt-Jakob Disease, Gerstmann-Straussler-Scheinker Disease, Tropical Spastic Paraparesis, Western Equine Encephalitis, California Encephalitis, St. Louis Encephalitis, Yellow Fever, Dengue, Lymphocytic choriomeningitis, Lassa Fever, Hemorrhagic Fever, Hantvirus Pulmonary Syndrome, Marburg Virus Infections, Ebola Virus Infections, Smallpox

a) Multi-Drug Therapy of Infectious Diseases

Methods for treating an infectious disease are disclosed including administering to a patient in need thereof an Exemplary Conjugate and another therapeutic agent that is an anti-infectious disease agent. In one embodiment, the anti-infectious disease agent is, but not limited to, agents listed in Table 6.

TABLE 6 β-Lactam Antibiotics: Penicillin G, Penicillin V, Cloxacilliin, Dicloxacillin, Methicillin, Nafcillin, Oxacillin, Ampicillin, Amoxicillin, Bacampicillin, Azlocillin, Carbenicillin, Mezlocillin, Piperacillin, Ticarcillin Aminoglycosides: Amikacin, Gentamicin, Kanamycin, Neomycin, Netilmicin, Streptomycin, Tobramycin Macrolides: Azithromycin, Clarithromycin, Erythromycin, Lincomycin, Clindamycin Tetracyclines: Demeclocycline, Doxycycline, Minocycline, Oxytetracycline, Tetracycline Quinolones: Cinoxacin, Nalidixic Acid Fluoroquinolones: Ciprofloxacin, Enoxacin, Grepafloxacin, Levofloxacin, Lomefloxacin, Norfloxacin, Ofloxacin, Sparfloxacin, Trovafloxicin Polypeptides: Bacitracin, Colistin, Polymyxin B Sulfonamides: Sulfisoxazole, Sulfamethoxazole, Sulfadiazine, Sulfamethizole, Sulfacetamide Miscellaneous Antibacterial Agents: Trimethoprim, Sulfamethazole, Chloramphenicol, Vancomycin, Metronidazole, Quinupristin, Dalfopristin, Rifampin, Spectinomycin, Nitrorurantoin General Antiviral Agents: Idoxuradine, Vidarabine, Trifhiridine, Acyclovir, Famcicyclovir, Pencicyclovir, Valacyclovir, Gancicyclovir, Foscarnet, Ribavirin, Amantadine, Rimantadine, Cidofovir, Antisense Oligonucleotides, Immunoglobulins, Inteferons Drugs for HIV infection: Tenofovir, Emtricitabine, Zidovudine, Didanosine, Zalcitabine, Stavudine, Lamivudine, Nevirapine, Delavirdine, Saquinavir, Ritonavir, Indinavir, Nelfinavir

III. EXAMPLES

The invention is further described in the following examples, which are not intended to limit the scope of the invention. Cell lines described in the following examples were maintained in culture according to the conditions specified by the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC) or Deutsche Sammlung von Mikroorganismen und Zellkulturen GmbH, Braunschweig, Germany (DMSZ). Cell culture reagents were obtained from Invitrogen Corp. (Carlsbad, Calif.).

Example 1 Preparation of Compound AB

Fmoc-val-cit-PAB-OH (14.61 g, 24.3 mmol, 1.0 eq., see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,214,345 to Firestone et al.) was diluted with DMF (120 mL, 0.2 M) and to this solution was added a diethylamine (60 mL). The reaction was monitored by HPLC and found to be complete in 2 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the resulting residue was precipitated using ethyl acetate (ca. 100 mL) under sonication for 10 min. Ether (200 mL) was added and the precipitate was further sonicated for 5 min. The solution was allowed to stand for 30 min. without stirring and was then filtered and dried under high vacuum to provide Val-cit-PAB-OH, which was used in the next step without further purification. Yield: 8.84 g (96%). Val-cit-PAB-OH (8.0 g, 21 mmol) was diluted with DMF (110 mL) and the resulting solution was treated with MC-OSu (Willner et al., 1993, Bioconjugate Chem. 4:521; 6.5 g, 21 mmol, 1.0 eq.). The reaction was complete according to HPLC after 2 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the resulting oil was precipitated using ethyl acetate (50 mL). After sonicating for 15 min, ether (400 mL) was added and the mixture was sonicated further until all large particles were broken up. The solution was then filtered and the solid dried to provide an off-white solid intermediate. Yield: 11.63 g (96%); ES-MS m/z 757.9 [M−H]

The off-white solid intermediate (8.0 g, 14.0 mmol) was diluted with DMF (120 mL, 0.12 M) and to the resulting solution was added bis(4-nitrophenyl)carbonate (8.5 g, 28.0 mmol, 2.0 eq.) and DIEA (3.66 mL, 21.0 mmol, 1.5 eq.). The reaction was complete in 1 h according to HPLC. The reaction mixture was concentrated to provide an oil that was precipitated with EtOAc, and then triturated with EtOAc (ca. 25 mL). The solute was further precipitated with ether (ca. 200 mL) and triturated for 15 min. The solid was filtered and dried under high vacuum to provide Compound AB which was 93% pure according to HPLC and used in the next step without further purification. Yield: 9.7 g (94%).

Example 2 General Preparation of Compound 1

The synthesis of MMAZ is shown on Schemes 5 and 6.

Preparation of Fmoc-Dolaproine (Fmoc-Dap)

Boc-Dolaproine (58.8 g, 0.205 mol) was suspended in 4 N HCl in 1,4-dioxane (256 mL, 1.02 mol, Aldrich). After stirring for 1.5 hours, TLC analysis indicated the reaction was complete (10% MeOH/CH₂Cl₂). The mixture was concentrated to near-dryness. Additional 1,4-dioxane was charged (50 mL) and the mixture was concentrated to dryness and dried under vacuum overnight. The resulting white solid was dissolved in H₂O (400 mL) and transferred to a 3-L, three-neck, round-bottom flask with a mechanical stirrer and temperature probe. N,N-diisopropylethylamine (214.3 mL, 1.23 mol, Acros) was added over one minute, causing an exotherm from 20.5 to 28.2° C. (internal). The mixture was cooled in an ice bath and 1,4-dioxane was added (400 mL). A solution of Fmoc-OSu (89.90 g, 0.267 mol, Advanced ChemTech) in 1,4-dioxane (400 mL) was added from an addition funnel over 15 minutes, maintaining the reaction temperature below 9° C. The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 19 hours, after which the mixture was concentrated by rotary evaporation to an aqueous slurry (390 g). The suspension was diluted with H₂O (750 mL) and Et₂O (750 mL). The layers were separated, keeping any solids with the organic layer. The aqueous layer was acidified using conc. HCl (30 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3×500 mL). The combined extracts were dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated A. The Et₂O extract was extracted once with sat. NaHCO₃ (200 mL), keeping any solids with the aqueous layer. The aqueous suspension was acidified using conc. HCl (50 mL) and extracted with Et₂O (50 mL) keeping any solids with the organic layer. The organic layer was filtered and concentrated. The two products were combined and purified by flash chromatography on silica gel eluting with CH₂Cl₂ (3.5 L), then 3% MeOH/CH₂Cl₂ (9 L) to give 68.23 g of Fmoc-dolaproine as a white foam (81%, 97.5% purity by HPLC (AUC)).

Preparation of Fmoc-Dap-Z

Phenylalanine bioisostere Z (48.3 mmol) is suspended in anhydrous DMF (105 mL, Acros) for 5 minutes and Fmoc-Dap (19.80 g, 48.3 mmol) is added. The mixture is cooled in an ice bath and TBTU (17.08 g, 53.20 mmol, Matrix Innovations) is added. N,N-diisopropylethylamine (25.3 mL, 145.0 mmol, Acros) is added via syringe over 3 min. After 1 h, the ice bath is removed and the mixture is allowed to warm over 30 min. The mixture is poured into water (1 L) and extracted with ethyl acetate (300 mL). After separation, the aqueous layer is re-extracted with ethyl acetate (2×150 mL). The combined organic layers are washed with brine (150 mL), dried (MgSO₄) and filtered (filter paper) to remove the insolubles (inorganics and some dibenzofulvene). After concentration, the residue is adsorbed on silica (41 g) and purified by chromatography (22 cm×8 cm column; 65% Heptane/EtOAc (2.5 L); 33% Heptane/EtOAc (3.8 L), to give product.

Preparation of Dap-Z

A 1-L round bottom flask is charged with Fmoc-Dap-Z, CH₂Cl₂ (122 mL) and diethylamine (61 mL, Acros). The solution is stirred at room temperature and the completion monitored by HPLC. After 7h, the mixture is concentrated (bath temp. <30° C.). The residue is suspended in CH₂Cl₂ (300 mL) and concentrated. This is repeated twice. To the residue is added MeOH (20 mL) and CH₂Cl₂ (300 mL), and the solution is concentrated. The residue is suspended in CH₂Cl₂ (100 mL) and toluene (400 mL), concentrated, and the residue left under vacuum overnight to give product.

Preparation of Fmoc-Meval-Val-Dil-Dap-Z

The tripeptide Fmoc-Meval-val-dil-O-t-Bu (prepared as described in WO 02/088172, entitled “Pentapeptide Compounds and Uses Related Thereto”; 0.73 mmol) is treated with TFA (3 mL), dichloromethane (3 mL) for 2 h at room temperature. The mixture is concentrated to dryness, the residue is co-evaporated with toluene (3×20 mL), and dried in vacuum overnight. The residue is diluted with dichloromethane (5 mL) and added to the deprotected dipeptide (287 mg, 0.73 mmol), followed by DIEA (550 μL, 4 eq.), DEPC (201 μL, 1.1 eq.). After 2 h at room temperature the reaction mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate (50 mL), washed successively with 10% aq. citric acid (2×20 mL), saturated aq. NaHCO₃ (2×10 mL), saturated aq. NaCl (10 mL). The organic layer is separated and concentrated. The resulting residue is re-suspended in ethyl acetate and is purified via flash chromatography in ethyl acetate. The relevant fractions are combined and concentrated to provide Fmoc-Meval-val-dil-dap-Z.

Alternative Preparation of Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-Dap-Z

Crude Dap-Z (39.1 mmol) is suspended in anhydrous DMF (135 mL, Acros) for 5 minutes and Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-OH (24.94 g, 39.1 mmol, see Example 2 for preparation) is added. The mixture is cooled in an ice bath and TBTU (13.81 g, 43.0 mmol, Matrix Innovations) is added. N,N-Diisopropylethylamine (20.5 mL, 117.3 mmol, Acros) is added via syringe over 2 minutes. After 1 hour, the ice bath is removed and the mixture is allowed to warm over 30 min. The mixture is poured into water (1.5 L) and diluted with ethyl acetate (480 mL). After standing for 15 minutes, the layers were separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (300 mL). The combined organic layers are washed with brine (200 mL), dried (MgSO₄) and filtered (filter paper) to remove insolubles (inorganics and some dibenzofulvene). After concentration, the residue (49 g) is scraped from the flask and adsorbed on silica (49 g) and purified by chromatography (15 cm×10 cm dia column; 2:1 EtOAc/Heptane (3 L), EtOAc (5 L); 250 mL fractions) to give Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-Dap-Z.

Preparation of Meval-Val-Dil-Dap-Z

The product (0.2 mmol) is diluted with dichloromethane (3 mL), diethylamine (1 mL). The reaction mixture is stirred overnight at room temperature. Solvents are removed to provide an oil that is purified by flash silica gel chromatography in a step gradient 0-10% MeOH in dichloromethane to provide Compound 1.

Example 3 Synthesis of MMApF, mc-MMApF, and mc-vc-PAB-MMApF

The synthesis of MMApF, the corresponding diethyl ester, maleimidocaproyl drug linker, and mc-vc-PAB-MMApF drug-Linker are shown below in Schemes 17, 17a and 18.

Preparation of Phosphonophenylalanine Diethyl Ester PP1

A solution of diethylphosphonomethylisonitrile (4.42 g, 25 mmol) in 10 mL CH₂Cl₂ was cooled to −78° C. and treated with potassium t-butoxide (4.3 g, 36 mmol). The anion solution was stirred 15 minutes, then treated with a dropwise addition of benzyl bromide (2.88 mL, 24.2 mmol) in 5 mL CH₂Cl₂ over 37 min. The reaction mixture was allowed to equilibrate to ambient temperature, stirred overnight, then quenched with H₂O and partitioned between CHCl₃ and NaCl. The combined organic phases were dried and concentrated in vacuo to a residual oil containing the alkylated isonitrile and excess benzyl bromide. This crude mixture was dissolved in EtOH, cooled to −10° C., and hydrolyzed by dropwise addition of 15 mL 6 N HCl. After stirring overnight at ambient temperature, an additional 6 mL 6 N HCl was added and the reaction continued for 6 h. The volatiles were removed in vacuo, and the aqueous residue washed with Et₂O and CH₂Cl₂. The pH was raised to 10 with solid K₂CO₃, and the product extracted into 4:1 CHCl₃:IPA. The organic solution was dried and concentrated in vacuo to 1.28 g product. The aqueous solution was lyophilized, and the residue extracted into CHCl₃ to give an additional 326 mg product for a combined yield of 1.66 g PP1 (6.25 mmol, 25%).

Preparation of BocDapphosphonoPhediethylester PP2

To an ice-bath cooled solution of Boc-Dap (1.74 g, 6.07 mmol) and diethylphosphonoPhe (PP1, 1.3 g, 5.06 mmol) in 20 mL CH₂Cl₂ were added, successively, HOAt (11.2 mL of a 0.5 M DMF solution, 5.6 mmol), DIEA (1.94 mL, 11.1 mmol), and HATU (2.11 g, 5.6 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred on ice for 2 h, diluted with CHCl₃, and washed with, successively, H₂O, 0.01N HCl, saturated NaHCO₃, and NaCl, dried over Na₂SO₄, and concentrated in vacuo to a white foam. The crude product was purified on a 5×14 mm flash silica column using a step gradient of 1%, then 2.5% MeOH in CH₂Cl₂. Fractions containing the product were pooled and concentrated in vacuo to give 1.68 g PP2 (3.2 mmol, 63%) as white foam. The two diastereomers appeared distinct on HPLC.

Preparation of DapphosphonoPhediethylester PP3

A solution of PP2 (1.62 g, 3.09 mmol) in 5 mL CH₂Cl₂ was treated with 5 mL TFA. After stirring at ambient temperature for 30 min, the reaction was determined to be complete by HPLC. The volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in toluene, and again the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was suspended in ether-heptane, and for a final time the volatiles were removed in vacuo to give PP3. After confirming the structure by ¹H NMR and LC-MS, the amine was reacted as a mixture of two distinct diastereomers without further purification.

Preparation of CbzMeValValDil

To a solution of FmocMeVal-Val-Dil-OtBu (3.47 g, 5 mmol) in 13 mL CH₂Cl₂ was added diethylamine (13 mL, 125 mmol), and the reaction mixture stirred at ambient temperature for 3.25 h. The volatiles were removed in vacuo, the residue dissolved in toluene, and again the volatiles were removed in vacuo to give 2.09 g of the crude free amine MeVal-Val-Dil-OtBu (4.4 mmol, 85%) a white solid.

To an ice-bath cooled solution of MeVal-Val-Dil-OtBu (1.84 g, 3.9 mmol) in 15 mL CH₂Cl₂ was added DIEA (2.04 mL, 11.7 mmol) and subsequently, dropwise, benzyl chloroformate (558 μL, 3.9 mmol) in 5 mL CH₂Cl₂. The reaction mixture was allowed to equilibrate to ambient temperature and stirred overnight. After diluting with CHCl₃ the reaction mixture was washed with H₂O, 0.01N HCl, saturated NaHCO₃, and NaCl, dried over MgSO₄, and concentrated in vacuo to 2.48 g CbzMeVal-Val-Dil-OtBu (PP4).

The PP4 tripeptide ester was dissolved in 5 mL CH₂Cl₂ and treated with 5 mL TFA. After 1 h HPLC showed all the ester had been converted to the more polar acid, and the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in toluene, and again the volatiles were removed in vacuo. The residue was suspended in ether-hexane and for a final time the volatiles were removed in vacuo to give CbzMeVal-Val-Dil as a colorless oil. After confirming the product by LC-MS m/z tripeptide acid was reacted without further purification.

Preparation of CbzNMeValValDilDapphosphonoPhe Diethylester (PP5)

A mixture of the amine PP3 and CbzMeVal-Val-Dil in CH₂Cl₂ was treated successively with DIEA (1.57 mL, 9 mmol) and, after additional DIEA to bring the pH to 8.5-9.0, PyBrop (1.82 g, 3.9 mmol). After stirring at ambient temperature overnight, additional PyBrop (560 mg, 1.2 mmol) and DIEA (to pH 9) were added. The reaction was allowed to proceed until HPLC showed that all compound PP3 had been consumed, approximately 3-5 h. After diluting with CHCl₃ the reaction mixture was washed with, successively, 0.01N HCl, saturated NaHCO₃, and NaCl, dried over MgSO₄, and concentrated in vacuo to 6.1 g of the crude pentapeptide. The product was purified on a 5×18 flash silica column eluting with EtOAc, followed by a step gradient of 2.5%, 5%, 10%, and 20% MeOH in EtOAc. Fractions containing the pure product were pooled and concentrated in vacuo while fractions containing the product plus unreacted acid were re-chromatographed. The combined pure pentapeptide fractions were combined to give 1.05 g PP5 (1.1 mmol, 37% over two steps).

Preparation of NMeValValDilDapphosphonoPhe Diethylester (PP6)

To an ice-bath cooled, nitrogen flushed stirred suspension of 10% Pd—C (20 mg wet Degussa catalyst, 50% H₂O, 0.01 mmol Pd) in 2 mL EtOH was added a solution of PP5 (50 mg, 0.05 mmol) in 3 mL EtOH. Hydrogen gas replaced the nitrogen, the cooling bath was removed, and the reaction was stirred while bubbling with hydrogen for 1 h. The catalyst was filtered off, and the crude peptide ester purified by RPHPLC (10×250 mm 4 Å, 80μ synergi MAX RP column) using a linear gradient of 30 to 95% B in A over 35 min. where A=0.05% TFA in H₂O, and B═CH₃CN, at 4.6 mL/min, and monitoring at 215 and 254 nM. The product containing fraction was lyophilized to give PP6 (1.1 mg, 0.001 mmol, 3%) as an epimeric mixture with respect to phosphonoPhe.

Preparation of NMeValValDilDapphosphonoPhe (MMapF)

To an ice-bath cooled solution of PP5 (813 mg, 0.84 mmol) in 10 mL CH₂Cl₂ was added TMSI (0.54 mL, 3.82 mmol). The cooling bath was removed, and the reaction mixture stirred for 1 h at ambient temperature. The volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was treated with a solution of propylene oxide (416 μL, 5.94 mmol) in 4 mL EtOH. After 45 min, the volatiles were removed in vacuo to give an orange solid that was suspended in diethyl ether-pentane, filtered, and washed well with diethyl ether-pentane to give 635 mg PP7 (0.83 mmol, 97%) as a yellow solid. Two 20 mg portions of the crude pentapeptide were purified on RP-HPLC (10×250 mm 4 Å, 80μ synergi MAX RP column) using a linear gradient of 10 to 95% B in A over 40 min. where A=0.05% TFA in H₂O and B═CH₃CN, at 4.6 mL/min, and monitoring at 215 and 254 nM. Fractions eluting between 18.7 and 19.1 min. were pooled and lyophilized to give 8.8 mg isomer A, MMApF-A. Fractions eluting between 19.7 and 20.0 min. were pooled and lyophilized to give 6.7 mg isomer B, MMApF-B. The resolved diastereomeric peptides were 87-92% pure with respect to stereochemistry.

Preparation of MaleimidocaproylNMeValValDilDapphosphonoPhe (PP8, mc-MMApF)

To an ice-bath cooled suspension of PP7 (177 mg, 0.23 mol) in 2 mL CH₂Cl₂ was added DIEA (145 μL, 0.83 mmol), which effected a clear solution, and then maleimidocaproyl chloride (0.3 mmol, prepared by the addition to maleimidocaproic acid, 63.2 mg, 0.3 mmol, of 1.5 mL oxalyl chloride, and 1 drop of DMF at 0° C. The reaction was allowed to stir at ambient temperature, the volatiles removed in vacuo overnight, and the reagent checked by HPLC and ¹H NMR, then used directly in the acylation.) The cooling bath was removed, and the reaction stirred at ambient temperature for 1.75 h, then concentrated in vacuo briefly before quenching the excess maleimidocaproyl chloride with water. The pH was adjusted to 3 with 0.1 N HCl, whereupon a white precipitate was formed. This was extracted into CHCl₃, and the aqueous phase extracted twice more with CHCl₃. The combined organic extracts were concentrated in vacuo to give 192 mg of the crude product. The product was purified via RP-HPLC in several batches. The best conditions were: 21.2×350 mm 4 Å, 80μ synergi MAX RP column using a method called ‘full prep 10, 50, 60, 90’, a series of connected linear gradients ranging from 10% to 90% % B in A over 56 min. where A=0.05% TFA in H₂O and B═CH₃CN, at 25 mL/min, and monitoring at 215 and 254 nM. Fractions eluting at 21.6 to 22.3 min. were pooled and lyophilized as 35.7 mg (16%) isomer A (mc-MMApF-A, PP8-A). The fractions eluting between 23.0 and 23.6 min. were pooled and lyophilized as 11.2 mg isomer B (mc-MMApF-A, PP8-A).

Preparation of MaleimidocaproylValCitp-aminobenzoyl-NMeValValDil-DapphosphonoPhe (mc-vc-PAB-MMApF, PP9)

To a solution of PP7 (30 mg, 0.039 mmol) and the linker AB (35 mg, 0.047 mmol) in 1 mL DMF were added, successively, pyridine (13 μL, 0.16 mol), DIEA (28 μL, 0.16 mol), and HOBt (1.6 mg, 0.012 mol). The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature overnight, then concentrated in vacuo and the product purified via RP-HPLC (10×250 mm 4 Å, 80μ synergi MAX RP column) using the method ‘prep 10, 30, 45, 90’, a series of connected linear gradients from 10% to 90% B in A over 42 min. where A=0.05% TFA in H₂O, and B═CH₃CN, at 4.6 mL/min, and monitoring at 215 and 254 nM. The product-containing fractions were pooled and lyophilized and purified a second time using a linear gradient from 10% to 65% B in A over 50 min to give, after lyophilization, 2.9 mg (5.4%) PP9, mc-vc-PAB-MMApF, as an epimeric mixture with respect to phosphonoPhe.

Example 4 Synthesis of MMApAs

The synthesis of AF-PAO, the corresponding arsine oxide is given below in Scheme 19.

Auristatin F can be prepared as described in Doronina et al., 2006, Bioconjugate Chem. 17(1): 114-124 using Dimethylvaline instead of Fmoc-Methylvaline as the N-terminal amino acid.

To a solution of auristatin F (10 mg, 13 μmol) and p-aminophenyl arsenoxide (3 mg, 16 μmol) in chloroform (200 μL) was added EEDQ (5 mg, 20 μmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 hours before being concentrated by passing nitrogen gas over the reaction mixture. The resulting residue was dissolved in DMSO (0.5 mL) and purified via reverse-phase preparative chromatography (see infra). Product containing fractions were concentrated to give the 4.7 mg (35%) of the desired aldehyde: MS m/z (ES+), 929.5 (M+H).

Preparative HPLC purifications was performed on a Varian instrument equipped with C12 Phenomenex Synergy MAX-RP 4μ 250×21.2 mm reversed phase column, eluting with 0.05% formic acid in a water and acetonitrile gradient at a flow rate of 4.6 mL/min with a gradient of 10% organic for 3 min followed by a ramp up to 50% organic over 50 min.

Example 5 Synthesis of MMAF-tetrazole

Preparation of Boc-Dap-Phe-Tetrazole (1001)

Cbz-Phe-NH₂ (4.86 g, 16.29 mmoles) was dissolved in DMF under nitrogen and cooled on ice bath. Cyanuric chloride (1.95 g, 10.59 mmoles) was added with stirring, and the mixture was allowed to warm to rt overnight. Water (100 ml) and ethyl acetate (250 ml) were added to the mixture. The organic phase was separated and washed three times with water (100 ml) and then dried over magnesium sulfate. The material was filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford Cbz-Phe-CN as a white solid (4.56 g, 99%) HPLC analysis: >99% purity; Retention time 10.1 min.

Cbz-Phe-CN (2.54 g, 9.06 mmole) with sodium azide (1.18 g, 18.12 mmole) and zinc bromide (1.02 g, 4.53 mmole) in a 2:1 mixture of water/isopropanol (90 ml) was then refluxed for 16 hr. The mixture was removed from heat and allowed to cool to room temperature. 1M HCL (14 ml) was added to the mixture, causing the formation of a white precipitate. Ethyl Acetate (30 ml) was then added and the mixture was stirred until the precipitate disappeared. The aqueous phase was separated and washed with ethyl acetate (70 ml). The combined organic layers were then washed with 100 ml of water containing 150 μL of 1 mM DTPA in PBS. The organic layer were dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to give Cbz-Phe-tetrazole as a white solid. (2.96 g, 91%) HPLC analysis: 99% at 6.6 min; ESMS m/z 324.24 (MH)⁺, 346.25 (M+Na)⁺

Cbz-Phe-Tetrazole (2.25 g, 6.25 mmole) was then dissolved in ethanol (100 ml) and treated with Pd/C 10% (500 mg, 0.3125 mmole) and stirred under hydrogen for 2 hr. The reaction mixture was filtered through a celite pad and concentrated to dryness. This material was reconstituted in dichloromethane (80 ml) and treated with Boc-Dap (1.88 g, 6.54 mmole), DEPC (1.42 ml, 9.38 mmole) and DIEA (3.8 ml, 21.88 mmole). After 16 hr volatiles were removed to afford crude Boc-Dap-Phe-Tetrazole which was purified by preparative HPLC to give 704 mg (20%) of 1001 as a white powder. Reverse-phase HPLC analysis: 99% at 6.3 min; LCMS (ESI): m/z 458.905 (MH)⁺, 480.874 (M+Na)⁺, eluted at 12.95 min.

Preparation of Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-OSu (1002)

To a solution of Fmoc-Me-Val-Val-Dil (2.06 g, 3.2 mmole) in THF (25 ml) was added N-hydroxysuccinimide (485 mg, 4.21 mmole) and DCC (1.45 g, 7.03 mmole). The mixture was stirred under nitrogen at room temperature for 48 hrs. Precipitate was filtered off and the filtrate concentrated in vacuo. Purification on silica gel with a step gradient of methanol (0%-5%) in dichloromethane gave 1.77 g (74.8%) of 1002 as a white solid HPLC analysis 95% at 13.72 min.

Preparation of MMAF-Tetrazole (1003)

To a solution of Boc-Dap-Phe-Tetrazole (1001, 100 mg, 0.218 mmole) in 3 ml of dichloromethane was added 1 ml of TFA. The mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. Volatiles were evaporated in vacuo, and the resulting material was reconstituted in dichloromethane and treated with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-OSu (1002, 128 mg, 0.174 mmole) and DIEA (114 uL, 0.654 mmole). After 16 hr the mixture was concentrated to near dryness and purified by radial silica gel chromatography with a step gradient of methanol (0%-5%) in dichloromethane.

The resulting material was dissolved in dichloromethane (3 ml) and treated with diethylamine (2 ml) with stirring. After 2 hrs volatiles were evaporated in vaccuo. The residue was sonicated in diethyl ether (10 ml) for 15 min and the crude solid was collected by filtration and then dissolved in ethyl acetate (4 ml). Product was then precipitated by the addition of 4 M HCL in 1,4-dioxane (1 ml). The resulting yellow solid was collected by filtration, washed with diethyl ether and dried in vaccuo give 63.4 mg (35%) 1003. Reverse phase HPLC analysis: 95% purity at 6.4 min. LCMS (ESI): m/z=756.442 (MH)⁺, 778.429 (M+Na)⁺, eluted at 10.83 min.

Example 6 Synthesis of mc-vc-PAB-MMAF-tetrazole (1005)

The synthesis of mc-vc-PAB-MeVal-Val-Dil-ODMB (1004) is as follows:

Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil×DCHA salt (500 mg, 0599 mmole) and 2,4-dimethtoxylbenzyl alcohol (101 mg, 0.599 mmole) were dissolved in dichloromethane (6 ml). N,N-dimethylformamide-di-tert-butyl-acetal (144 μL, 0.599 mmole) was then added and the solution was stirred for 16 hr at room temperature. The mixture was then concentrated to near dryness and purified on silica gel eluting with a step gradient of ethyl acetate (from 0% to 30%) in hexanes to provide 206 mg (46%) of Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-ODMB as white solid. HPLC analysis: 98% at 15 min.

Fmoc removal was achieved by treating a solution of the above material (191 mg, 0.242 mmole) in dichloromethane (4 ml) with diethylamine (2 ml) with stirring at room temperature for 4 hrs. The mixture was then filtered, concentrated in vaccuo to near dryness and purified on silica gel with a step gradient of methanol (0%-3%) in dichloromethane to give MeVal-Val-Dil-ODMB as a white solid, 97 mg (71%). HPLC analysis: >95% purity at 12 min. LCMS (ESI) m/z: 566.021 (MH)+, 588.007 (M+Na)+, eluted at 11.43 min.

This material (67 mg, 0.118 mmole) and MC-vc-PAB-OCO-pNP (AB, 96 mg, 0.130 mmole) were then dissolved in DMF (2 ml) and treated with DIEA (41 μL, 0.236 mmole) and HOBT (7.7 mg, 0.056 mmole). After stirring for 16 hr at room temperature, the mixture was concentrated to near dryness, diluted with 2 ml of DMSO and purified by reverse phase preparative HPLC to give 64 mg (47%) of MC-vc-PAB-MeVal-Val-Dil-ODMB as a glassy solid. LCMS (ESI) m/z: 1164.648 (MH)+, 1186.581 (M+Na)+, eluted at 13.49 min

Assembly of MC-vc-PAB-MMAF-tetrazole (1005)

Dimethoxybenzyl group (DMB) deprotection of 1004 was carried out by treating the ester (29 mg, 0.0246 mmole) with a 2% TFA/dichloromethane solution for 1 hr. The mixture was then filtered, the filtrate concentrated, and dried thoroughly in vacuo to afford MC-vc-PAB-MeVal-Val-Dil as a white solid.

Simultaneously the Boc group of 1001 was removed by dissolving the dipeptide (14 mg, 0.0246 mmole) in dichloromethane (150 μL) and treating with TFA (150 μL) for 1 hr. The mixture was concentrated and dried thoroughly in vacuo to give Dap-Phe-Tetrazole as glassy solid.

This material was then dissolved in DMF (300 μL) and added to the entirety of the MC-vc-PAB-MeVal-Val-Dil that was generated previously. DIEA (21 μL, 0.123 mmole) was then added, followed by DEPC (6 uL, 0.037 mmole) and the mixture was stirred for 2 hr at rt. The mixture was then concentrated to near dryness, diluted with DMSO (1 ml) and purified by reverse phase preparative HPLC to give 7 mg (20%) of 1005 as a white solid. HPLC analysis: 95% at 6.6 min. LCMS (ESI) m/z: 1355.039 (MH)+, 1377.004 (M+Na)⁺, eluted at 12.8 min.

Example 7 Synthesis of MC-MMAF-tetrazole (1006)

MC-MMAF-Tetrazole was prepared according to General Procedure I.

Maleimidocaproic acid (30 mg, Molecular Biosciences), and anhydrous DMF (10 μl) in 10 mL glass flask under Ar (balloon) were cooled on dry ice for 5 min. To this mixture oxalyl chloride (1 mL) was added by syringe (noting a vigorous reaction and pressure increase). After 5 min, the mixture was allowed to warm up to room temperature and left for 30 min. with occasional manual stirring. Volatiles were removed on a Rotavap. The residue was co-evaporated with anhydrous CH₂Cl₂ (1 mL) and dried at vacuum pump overnight. Product is initially generated as a white solid, progressively turning into off-white to brownish solid. ¹H-NMR in CDCl₃: 1.26-1.32 (2H, m), 1.51-1.59 (2H, m), 1.63-1.70 (2H, m), 2.82 (2H, t), 3.46 (2H, t), 6.70 (2H, s) ppm. Hydrolyzed material can be detected by triplet at 2.35 ppm. Product is used if the integral of the triplet at 2.42 ppm does not exceed 20% of the triplet at 3.46 ppm. (Note: when the product was obtained as oil instead of solid, subsequent acylation was more difficult.)

MMAF-Tetrazole (1003, see Example 5; 6 mg, 0.007 mmole) was dissolved in 200 μL of dichloromethane with DIEA (5.5 μL, 0.035 mmole) under nitrogen and cooled on an ice bath. Maleimidocaproic acid chloride (1.8 mg, 0.0078 mmole, in 150 μL of dichloromethane was then added with stirring and the solution was allowed to warm to room temperature overnight. The mixture was then concentrated to dryness, dissolved in DMSO (1 ml) and purified by preparative HPLC to afford 5.8 mg (87%) of product as a white solid. HPLC analysis: 95% at 7.5 min. LCMS (ESI) m/z: 949.876 (MH)+, 971.880 (M+Na)+, eluted at 13.12 min.

Example 8 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analog is synthesized as shown below:

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2.

Example 9 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analog is synthesized as shown below:

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2.

Example 10 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analog is synthesized as shown below:

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2.

Example 11 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

and R′ is lower alkyl; R′ is lower alkyl or aryl.

The phenylalanine analog is synthesized as shown below and as described by Gallop and Bhat, International Patent Application Publication WO 2005010011:

wherein A is H or a amine protecting group (e.g. Fmoc, Boc, a protected MMAZ peptide or fragment thereof).

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2.

Example 12 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized as shown below following the procedures described in Zemlicka and Murata, 1976, Journal of Organic Chemistry 41(20):3317-21.

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2.

Example 13 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized following the procedures described in Xiang et al, International Patent Application Publication WO 2002070653. MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2. If the hydroxyl group requires a protecting group, TBDMS could be used, and could be removed with TBAF, along with the N-terminal Fmoc group, at the step where FmocMMAZ becomes MMAZ, just before adding MC.

Example 14 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized as shown below following the procedures described in Reid et al., International Patent Application Publication WO 2002008189.

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2. The phosphonate OP(O)O may be protected throughout the synthesis using protecting groups (PG) known to those skilled in the art, for example those cited in Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2nd Edition, 1991, John Wiley & Sons.

Example 15 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized following the procedures described in Jackson, U.S. Pat. No. 3,925,360; Guo et al., International Patent Application Publication WO 2004087720; and Cooper, 1973, Journal of Medicinal Chemistry 16(9):1057-9.

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2.

Example 16 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized following the procedures described in Neelakantan and Hartung, 1959, Journal of Organic Chemistry 24:1943-8.

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2. The sulphonate may be protected throughout the synthesis using protecting groups (PG) known to those skilled in the art, for example those cited in Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2nd Edition, 1991, John Wiley & Sons.

Example 17 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized as shown below:

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2.

Example 18 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized as shown below following the procedures described in Xiang et al, International Patent Application Publication WO 2002070653.

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2.

Example 19 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized as shown below:

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2.

Example 20 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

wherein R′ is lower alkyl and R′ is lower alkyl or aryl.

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized as shown below following the procedures described in Gallop and Bhat, International Patent Application Publication WO 2005010011.

wherein A is H or a amine protecting group (e.g., Fmoc, Boc, a protected MMAZ peptide or fragment thereof).

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2.

Example 21 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized as shown below following the procedures described in Zemlicka and Murata, 1976, Journal of Organic Chemistry 41(20):3317-21.

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2.

Example 22 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized as shown below following the procedures described in Reid et al., International Patent Application Publication WO 2002/008189.

wherein A is H or a amine protecting group (e.g., Fmoc, Boc, a protected MMAZ peptide or fragment thereof).

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2.

Example 23 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized as shown below:

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2.

Example 24 Preparation of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized as shown below

wherein A is H or a amine protecting group (e.g. Fmoc, Boc, a protected MMAZ peptide or fragment thereof).

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2. The sulfuric acid group may be protected throughout the synthesis using protecting groups (PG) known to those skilled in the art, for example those cited in Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2nd Edition, 1991, John Wiley & Sons.

Example 25 Synthesis of MMAZ Compounds

Using the above procedures, the compounds of the following formula can be prepared:

wherein

The phenylalanine analogs are synthesized as shown below following the procedures described in Neelakantan and Hargun, 1959, J. Org. Chem. 24:1943.

MMAZ is prepared by using the above phenylalanine analog and conjugating with Fmoc-MeVal-Val-Dil-O-t-Bu following the procedure of Example 2. The sulfonate may be protected throughout the synthesis using protecting groups (PG) known to those skilled in the art, for example those cited in Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2nd Edition, 1991, John Wiley & Sons.

Example 26 Synthesis of MC-MMAZ

The synthesis of MC-MMAZ is shown below.

MMAZ (0.163 mmol) is suspended in CH₂Cl₂ (0.500 mL). 6-Maleimidocaproic acid (68.9 mg, 0.326 mmol) and 1,3-diisopropylcarbodiimide (0.0505 mL, 0.326 mmol) were added followed by pyridine (0.500 mL). The reaction mixture is allowed to stir for 1 hr. HPLC analysis indicated complete consumption of starting compound. Volatile organics were evaporated under reduced pressure. The product is isolated via flash column chromatography, using a step gradient from 0 to 5% Methanol in CH₂Cl₂.

An Alternative Preparation of MC-MeVal-Val-Dil-Dap-Z

A 50-mL, round-bottom flask is charged with MeVal-Val-Dil-Dap-Z (0.85 mmol), anhydrous DMF (4 mL), maleimidocaproic acid (180 mg, 0.85 mmol), and TBTU (300 mg, 0.93 mmol, Matrix Innovations) at room temperature. N,N-Diisopropylethylamine (450 μL, 2.57 mmol) is added via syringe. After 1.5 hours, the mixture is poured in water (50 mL) and diluted with ethyl acetate (30 mL). NaCl is added to improve the separation. After separation of the layers, the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (25 mL). The combined organic layers are dried (MgSO₄), filtered and concentrated. The resulting product is purified by flash chromatography (100 mL silica; 25% Heptane/EtOAc (100 mL), 10% Heptane/EtOAc (200 mL), EtOAc (1.5 L)) to give MC-MeVal-Val-Dil-Dap-Z.

Alternatively, Maleimidocaproyl-MeVal-Val-Dil-Dap-Z can be prepared following the General Procedure I.

Maleimidocaproic acid (30 mg, Molecular Biosciences), and anhydrous DMF (10 μl) in 10 mL glass flask under Ar (balloon) were cooled on dry ice for 5 min. To this mixture oxalyl chloride (1 mL) was added by syringe (Attention: vigorous reaction, pressure increase). After 5 min, the mixture was allowed to warm up to room temperature and left for 30 min with occasional manual stirring. Volatiles were removed on Rotavap, residue was co-evaporated with anhydrous CH₂Cl₂ (1 mL) and dried at vacuum pump overnight. The product is initially generated as white solid, progressively turning into off-white to brownish solid. ¹H-NMR in CDCl₃: 1.26-1.32 (2H, m), 1.51-1.59 (2H, m), 1.63-1.70 (2H, m), 2.82 (2H, t), 3.46 (2H, t), 6.70 (2H, s) ppm. Hydrolyzed material can be detected by triplet at 2.35 ppm. Product can only be used if integral of the triplet at 2.42 ppm does not exceed 20% of the triplet at 3.46 ppm.

Maleimidocaproyl chloride prepared as described above was dissolved in anhydrous CH₂Cl₂ (3 mL).

MMAZ (1 eq.) and diisopropylethylamine (˜4 eq.) are dissolved in anhydrous CH₂Cl₂ in a glass flask equipped with magnetic stir bar and rubber cap. The reaction mixture is cooled on the ice bath for 10 min and maleimidocaproyl chloride solution (˜1.1 eq.) is added via syringe. After 15 min on ice, reaction mixture is allowed to warm up to room temperature and stirring is continued for 2 more hours. Solvent is then removed in vacuo. Residue is suspended in DMSO (0.5 mL). Water (100 μl) is then added and after 0.5 h mixture is loaded on preparative HPLC column for separation: C₁₂ Phenomenex Synergi MAX-RP column, 4μ, 250×10 mm, 80 A. Monitoring at 215 nm. Product containing fractions are concentrated on Rotavap, co-evaporated with acetonitrile (2×5 mL), then with mixture of CH₂Cl₂ and hexane to provide final material.

Example 27 Synthesis of an Analog of MC-MMAZ

The synthesis of an analog of MC-MMAZ is shown below.

MeVal-Val-Dil-Dap-Z-PG (compound 1, 0.044 mmol) is suspended in DMF (0.250 mL). 4-(2,5-Dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl)-benzoic acid (11 mg, 0.049 mmol) and HATU (17 mg, 0.044 mmol) are added followed by DIEA (0.031 mL, 0.17 mmol). This reaction mixture is allowed to stir for 2 hr. HPLC analysis indicated complete consumption of starting compound 1. Product is isolated via preparatory RP-HPLC, using a Phenomenex C₁₂ Synergi Max-RP 80 Å Column (250×21.20 mm). Eluent: linear gradient 10% to 80% MeCN/0.05% TFA (aq) over 8 minutes, then isocratic 80% MeCN/0.05% TFA (aq) for an additional 12 minutes. MB-MeVal-Val-Dil-Dap-Z-PG (0.0385 mmol) is suspended in CH₂Cl₂ (1 mL) and TFA (1 mL). Mixture is stirred for 2.0 hr, and then volatile organics were evaporated under reduced pressure. Product (MB-MeVal-Val-Dil-Dap-Z) is purified by preparatory RP-HPLC, using a Phenomenex C₁₂ Synergi Max-RP 80 Å Column (250×21.20 mm). Eluent: linear gradient 10% to 80% MeCN/0.05% TFA (aq) over 8 minutes, then isocratic 80% MeCN/0.05% TFA (aq) for an additional 12 minutes.

Example 28 Preparation of MC-val-cit-PAB-MMAZ (9)

Compound 1 (0.11 mmol), Compound AB (85 mg, 0.12 mmol, 1.1 eq.), and HOBt (2.8 mg, 21 μmol, 0.2 eq.) are taken up in dry DMF (1.5 mL) and pyridine (0.3 mL) while under argon. After 2 h, the mixture is evaporated, taken up in a minimal amount of DMSO and purified by prep-HPLC (C₁₂—RP column, 5μ, 100 Å, linear gradient of MeCN in water (containing 0.1% TFA) 10 to 100% in 40 min followed by 20 min at 100%, at a flow rate of 25 mL/min) to provide Compound 9.

Example 29 Preparation of Antibody-MC-MMAZ by Conjugation of Antibody and MC-MMAZ

Antibody (e.g., AC10 or 1F6), dissolved in 500 mM sodium borate and 500 mM sodium chloride at pH 8.0, is treated with an excess of 100 mM dithiothreitol (DTT). After incubation at 37° C. for about 30 minutes, the buffer is exchanged by elution over Sephadex G25 resin and eluted with PBS with 1 mM DTPA. The thiol/Ab value is checked by determining the reduced antibody concentration from the absorbance at 280 nm of the solution and the thiol concentration by reaction with DTNB (Aldrich, Milwaukee, Wis.) and determination of the absorbance at 412 nm. The reduced antibody is dissolved in PBS and chilled on ice.

The drug linker reagent, maleimidocaproyl-monomethyl auristatin Z, i.e. MC-MMAZ, dissolved in DMSO, is diluted in acetonitrile and water at known concentration, and added to the chilled reduced antibody (e.g., AC10 or 1F6) in PBS. After about one hour, an excess of maleimide is added to quench the reaction and cap any unreacted antibody thiol groups. The reaction mixture is concentrated by centrifugal ultrafiltration and antibody-MC-MMAZ is purified and desalted by elution through G25 resin in PBS, filtered through 0.2 μm filters under sterile conditions, and frozen for storage.

Example 30 Preparation of Antibody-MC-val-cit-PAB-MMAZ by Conjugation of Antibody and MC-val-cit-PAB-MMAZ (9)

Antibody-MC-val-cit-PAB-MMAZ is prepared by conjugation of antibody (e.g., AC10 or 1F6) and MC-val-cit-PAB-MMAZ (9) following the procedure of Example 26.

Example 31 Preparation of Mc-MeVal-Cit-Pab-MMAZ

To a room temperature suspension of Fmoc-MeVal-OH (3.03 g, 8.57 mmol) and N,N′-disuccimidyl carbonate (3.29 g, 12.86 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (80 mL) is added DIEA (4.48 mL, 25.71 mmol). This reaction mixture is allowed to stir for 3 hr, and then poured into a separation funnel where the organic mixture is extracted with 0.1 M HCl (aq). The crude organic residue is concentrated under reduced pressure, and the product is isolated by flash column chromatography on silica gel using a 20-100% ethyl acetate/hexanes linear gradient. A total of 2.18 g of pure Fmoc-MeVal-OSu (4.80 mmoles, 56% yield) is recovered. To a room temperature suspension of Fmoc-MeVal-OSu (2.18 g, 4.84 mmol) in DME (13 mL) and THF (6.5 mL) is added a solution of L-citrulline (0.85 g, 4.84 mmol) and NaHCO₃ (0.41 g, 4.84 mmol) in H₂O (13 mL). The suspension is allowed to stir at room temperature for 16 hr, then it is extracted into tert-BuOH/CHCl₃/H₂O, acidified to pH=2-3 with 1 M HCl. The organic phase is separated, dried and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue is triturated with diethyl ether resulting in 2.01 g of Fmoc-MeVal-Cit-COOH which is used without further purification.

The crude Fmoc-MeVal-Cit-COOH is suspended in 2:1 CH₂Cl₂/MeOH (100 mL), and to it is added p-aminobenzyl alcohol (0.97 g, 7.9 mmol) and EEDQ (1.95 g, 7.9 mmol). This suspension is allowed to stir for 125 hr, then the volatile organics were removed under reduced pressure, and the residue is purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel using a 10% MeOH/CH₂Cl₂. Pure Fmoc-MeVal-Cit-PAB-OH (0.55 g, 0.896 mmol, 18.5% yield) is recovered.

To a suspension of Fmoc-MeVal-Cit-PAB-OH (0.55 g, 0.896 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (40 mL) is added STRATOSPHERES™ (piperizine-resin-bound) (>5 mmol/g, 150 mg). After being stirred at room temperature for 16 hr the mixture is filtered through celite (pre-washed with MeOH), and concentrated under reduced pressure. Residue is triturated with diethyl ether and hexanes. Resulting solid material, MeVal-Cit-PAB-OH, is suspended in CH₂Cl₂ (20 mL), and to it is added MC-OSu (0.28 g, 0.896 mmol), DIEA (0.17 mL, 0.99 mmol), and DMF (15 mL). This suspension is stirred for 16 hr, but HPLC analysis of the reaction mixture indicated incomplete reaction, so the suspension is concentrated under reduced pressure to a volume of 6 mL, then a 10% NaHCO₃ (aq) solution is added and the suspension stirred for an additional 16 hr. Solvent is removed under reduced pressure, and the residue is purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel using a 0-10% MeOH/CH₂Cl₂ gradient, resulting in 42 mg (0.072 mmol, 8% yield) of MC-MeVal-Cit-PAB-OH.

To a suspension of MC-MeVal-Cit-PAB-OH (2.37 g, 4.04 mmol) and bis(nitrophenyl)carbonate (2.59 g, 8.52 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (10 mL) is added DIEA (1.06 mL, 6.06 mmol). This suspension is stirred for 5.5 hr, concentrated under reduced pressure and purified by trituration with diethyl ether. MC-MeVal-Cit-PAB-OCO-pNP (147 mg, 0.196 mmol) is suspended in a 1:5 pyridine/DMF solution (3 mL), and to it is added HOBt (5 mg, 0.039 mmol), DIEA (0.17 mL, 0.978 mmol) and MMAZ (0.205 mmol). This reaction mixture is stirred for 16 hr at room temperature, and then purified by preparatory RP-HPLC (×3), using a Phenomenex C₁₂ Synergi Max-RP 80 Å Column (250×21.20 mm). Eluent: linear gradient 10% to 90% MeCN/0.05% TFA (aq) over 30 minutes, then isocratic 90% MeCN/0.05% TFA (aq) for an additional 20 minutes. MC-MeVal-Cit-PAB-MMAZ is obtained.

Example 32 Preparation of Succinimide Ester of Suberyl-Val-Cit-PAB-MMAZ (PP10)

Compound 1 (0.38 mmol), Fmoc-Val-Cit-PAB-pNP (436 mg, 0.57 mmol, 1.5 eq.) are suspended in anhydrous pyridine, 5 mL. HOBt (10 mg, 0.076 mmol, 0.2 eq.) is added followed by DIEA (199 μl, 1.14 μmmol, 3 eq.). The reaction mixture is sonicated for 10 min, and then stirred overnight at room temperature. Pyridine is removed under reduced pressure, residue is re-suspended in CH₂Cl₂. Mixture is separated by silica gel flash chromatography in a step gradient of MeOH, from 0 to 10%, in CH₂Cl₂. The product-containing fractions are pulled, concentrated, dried in vacuum overnight to give Fmoc-Val-Cit-PAB-MMAZ.

Fmoc-Val-Cit-PAB-MMAZ is suspended in CH₂Cl₂ (2 mL) diethylamine (2 mL) and DMF (2 mL). Mixture is stirred for 2 hours at room temperature. Solvent is removed under reduced pressure. Residue is co-evaporated with pyridine (2 mL), then with toluene (2×5 mL), dried in vacuum. Val-Cit-PAB-MMAZ is obtained.

All Val-Cit-PAB-MMAZ prepared from Fmoc-Val-Cit-PAB-MMAZ is suspended in pyridine (2 mL), and added to a solution of disuccinimidyl suberate (74 mg, 0.2 mmol, 4 eq.), in pyridine (1 mL). The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature. After 3 hours ether (20 mL) is added. Precipitate is collected, washed with additional amount of ether. The solid is suspended in 30% MeOH/CH₂Cl₂, filtered trough a pad of silica gel with 30% MeOH/CH₂Cl₂ as an eluent to generate Compound PP10.

Example 33 Determination of Cytotoxicity of Selected Compounds

The cytotoxic activity of MMAZ and other compounds is evaluated on the Lewis Y positive cell lines OVCAR-3, H3396 breast carcinoma, L2987 lung carcinoma and LS174t colon carcinoma Lewis Y positive cell lines can be assayed for cytotoxicity. To evaluate the cytotoxicity of compounds, cells can be seeded at approximately 5-10,000 per well in 150 μl of culture medium then treated with graded doses of compounds in quadruplicates at the initiation of assay. Cytotoxicity assays are usually carried out for 96 hours after addition of test compounds. Fifty μl of resazurin dye may be added to each well during the last 4 to 6 hours of the incubation to assess viable cells at the end of culture. Dye reduction can be determined by fluorescence spectrometry using the excitation and emission wavelengths of 535 nm and 590 nm, respectively. For analysis, the extent of resazurin reduction by the treated cells can be compared to that of the untreated control cells.

Example 34 In vitro activity of MMApF and MMApF Diethyl Ester

Table 7 shows in vitro activity of a MMApF as a racemic free drug and the Drug PP5 (MMApF diethyl ester) against the renal cell carcinoma cell lines 786-O and Caki-1, the colon carcinoma cell line HCT-116, the anaplastic large cell lymphoma cell line Karpas 299, and the Hodgkin's disease cell lines L428 and L540cy. The assays were performed as described above.

TABLE 7 IC₅₀s (nM) HCT- Karpas Drug 786-O Caki-1 116 299 L428 L540cy PP5 1.1 0.009 0.085 0.2 1.26 0.25 MMApF-A NT NT NT 790 237 363 MMApF-B NT NT NT 470 935 363 Mitomycin C 32.3 14.5 166 105 187 134 MMAF 380 234 310 240 58 130 NT—not tested

Example 35 In vitro Activity of MMAF-Tetrazole

Table 8 shows in vitro activity of Drug 1003 (MMAF-Tetrazole) against breast carcinoma cell line H3396.

TABLE 8 IC₅₀ (nM) Drug H3396 Drug 1003 6 MMAF 15 MMAE .7

Example 36 General In vitro Cytotoxicity Determination

To evaluate the cytotoxicity of Exemplary Conjugates, cells are seeded at approximately 5-10,000 per well in 150 μl of culture medium then treated with graded doses of Exemplary Conjugates in quadruplicates at the initiation of assay. Cytotoxicity assays are carried out for 96 hours after addition of test compounds. Fifty μl of the resazurin dye is added to each well during the last 4 to 6 hours of the incubation to assess viable cells at the end of culture. Dye reduction is determined by fluorescence spectrometry using the excitation and emission wavelengths of 535 nm and 590 nm, respectively. For analysis, the extent of resazurin reduction by the treated cells is compared to that of the untreated control cells.

Example 37 In vitro Cell Proliferation Assay

Efficacy of ADC can be measured by a cell proliferation assay employing the following protocol (Promega Corp. Technical Bulletin TB288; Mendoza et al., 2002, Cancer Res. 62:5485-5488):

-   1. An aliquot of 100 μL of cell culture containing about 10⁴ cells     (SKBR-3, BT474, MCF7 or MDA-MB-468) in medium is deposited in each     well of a 96-well, opaque-walled plate. -   2. Control wells were prepared containing medium and without cells. -   3. ADC is added to the experimental wells and incubated for 3-5     days. -   4. The plates were equilibrated to room temperature for     approximately 30 minutes. -   5. A volume of CellTiter-Glo Reagent equal to the volume of cell     culture medium present in each well is added. -   6. The contents were mixed for 2 minutes on an orbital shaker to     induce cell lysis. -   7. The plate is incubated at room temperature for 10 minutes to     stabilize the luminescence signal. -   8. Luminescence is recorded and reported in graphs as RLU=relative     luminescence units.

Example 38 Plasma Clearance in Rat

Plasma clearance pharmacokinetics of antibody drug conjugates and total antibody is studied in Sprague-Dawley rats (Charles River Laboratories, 250-275 gms each). Animals were dosed by bolus tail vein injection (IV Push). Approximately 300 μl whole blood is collected through jugular cannula, or by tail stick, into lithium/heparin anticoagulant vessels at each timepoint: 0 (predose), 10, and 30 minutes; 1, 2, 4, 8, 24 and 36 hours; and 2, 3, 4, 7, 14, 21, 28 days post dose. Total antibody is measured by ELISA-ECD/GxhuFc-HRP. Antibody drug conjugate is measured by ELISA-MMAZ/ECD-Bio/SA-HRP.

Example 39 Plasma Clearance in Monkey

Plasma clearance pharmacokinetics of antibody drug conjugates and total antibody can be studied in cynomolgus monkeys, generally as described above.

Example 40 Tumor Volume In Vivo Efficacy in Transgenic Explant Mice

Animals suitable for transgenic experiments can be obtained from standard commercial sources such as Taconic (Germantown, N.Y.). Many strains are suitable, but FVB female mice are preferred because of their higher susceptibility to tumor formation. FVB males can be used for mating and vasectomized CD.1 studs can be used to stimulate pseudopregnancy. Vasectomized mice can be obtained from any commercial supplier. Founders can be bred with either FVB mice or with 129/BL6×FVB p53 heterozygous mice. The mice with heterozygosity at p53 allele can be used to potentially increase tumor formation. Some F1 tumors are of mixed strain. Founder tumors can be FVB only.

Animals having tumors (allograft propagated from Fo5 mmtv transgenic mice) can be treated with a single or multiple dose by IV injection of ADC. Tumor volume can be assessed at various time points after injection.

Example 41 In vivo Efficacy of mcMMAZ Antibody Drug Conjugates

Efficacy of cAC10-mcMMAZ in Karpas-299 ALCL xenografts: To evaluate the in vivo efficacy of cAC10-mcMMAZ with an average of 4 drug moieties per antibody (cAC10-mcF4), Karpas-299 human ALCL cells are implanted subcutaneously into immunodeficient C.B-17 SCID mice (5×10⁶ cells per mouse). Tumor volumes are calculated using the formula (0.5×L×W²) where L and W are the longer and shorter of two bidirectional measurements.

Efficacy of cBR96-mcMMAZ in L2987 NSCLC Xenografts:

cBR96 is a chimeric antibody that recognizes the Le^(Y) antigen. To evaluate the in vivo efficacy of cBR96-mcMMAZ with 4 drugs per antibody (cBR96-mcF4) L2987 non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC) tumor fragments are implanted into athymic nude mice. When the tumors average approximately 100 mm³ the mice are divided into 3 groups: untreated and 2 therapy groups.

Example 42 In vitro efficacy of Antibody Drug Conjugates

Activity of 1F6-Antibody Drug Conjugates against CD70⁺ cell lines. Tables 9 and 10 show IC₅₀ values for the conjugates of anti-CD70 antibodies c1F6 (chimeric 1F6) and h1F6 (humanized 1F6) with Linker-Drugs on CD70+ cell lines after 96 hours incubation. IC₅₀ values are defined as the concentration where growth is reduced 50% compared with untreated control cultures. Each concentration is tested in quadruplicate. The conjugates contain 4 drugs per antibody.

Table 9 shows the in vitro activity of the indicated c1F6-Antibody Drug Conjugates against CD70+ (786-O and Caki-1) renal cell carcinoma cell lines.

TABLE 9 IC₅₀ of c1F6 ADCs (ng/mL) Linker-Drug (4) 786-O Caki-1 mc-MMApF-A 3.5 8.9 mc-MMApF-B >1000 >1000 mc-vc-PAB-MMApF >1000 29.5 mc-MMAF 135 47.3 mc-vc-PAB-MMAF 3.5 2.5

Table 10 shows in vitro activity of h1F6-antibody-1005 (h1F6-mc-vc-PAB-MMAF-Tetrazole) conjugates against CD70+ (U251, L428 and Caki-1) cell lines.

TABLE 10 IC₅₀ of h1F6 ADCs (ng/mL) Linker-Drug (4) U251 Caki-1 L428 1005 10 7 5 mc-vc-PAB-MMAF 10 7 8

Activity of cAC10-Antibody Drug Conjugates Against CD30⁺ Cell Lines.

Table 11 shows IC₅₀ values for the conjugates of the chimeric anti-CD30 antibody cAC10 with Linker-Drugs on CD30+ cell lines (Karpas 299, L428 and L540cy), 96 hours incubation. IC₅₀ values are defined as the concentration where growth is reduced 50% compared with untreated control cultures. Each concentration is tested in quadruplicate. The conjugates contain 4 drugs per antibody.

TABLE 11 IC₅₀ of cAC10 ADCs (ng/mL) Linker-Drug (4) Karpas 299 L540cy L428 mc-MMApF-A 10.9 2.7 0.423 mc-MMApF-B >5000 >5000 >5000 mc-MMAF 7.6 3.4 1.3

As shown in Table 7, 8 and 9, the in vitro potency of the 1F6 and cAC10 conjugates, MMApF-A and 1003, were comparable to that of corresponding MMAF conjugates at the same drug loading. The substantial difference in activities of the two diastereomers of MMApF indicates a stereospecific mode of action.

Example 43 Preparation of c1F6-AF-PAO Conjugates

To each of 7 aliquots of c1F6, previously reduced and stored frozen (7.9 SH/Ab, 7.0 mg/L, 2.1 mg, 300 μL) was added 80 μL of DMSO followed by 1, 2, 2, 3, 4, 4, or 5 molar equivalents of AF-PAO (1010) as a 10 mM solution in DMSO. One each conjugation at 2, and 4 equivalents was performed in the presence of Cysteine (20 μL of 100 mM). The reactions were allowed to proceed on ice for 1 hr. The conjugates were then isolated by purification on PD10 columns. Drug loading was determined by stripping the AF-PAO from the antibody with DTT, then quantifying the released drug by RPHPLC. A standard curve was generated by treating AF-PAO -DTT complexes directly and analyzing them under the same RPHPLC conditions. The analysis indicated that stable conjugates between c1F6 and AF-PAO were formed, and that the loading level was related to the quantity of AF-PAO in the reaction mixture. It also indicates that cysteine does not quench AF-PAO or inhibit its reaction with reduced antibody.

Eq. AF-PAO Rxn Mixture AF-PAO/Ab 1 0.4 2 0.9 2 0.9 3 1.4 4 1.8 4 1.5 5 2.4

Example 44 Activity of Antibody Drug Conjugates Against CD70+ Cell Lines

Table 12 shows IC₅₀ values for the conjugates of anti-CD70 antibodies c1F6 (chimeric 1F6) with Linker-Drugs AF-PAO or MMAF on CD70⁺ cell lines after 96 hours incubation. The conjugates contain 2.4 or 4 drugs per antibody, respectively.

TABLE 12 IC₅₀s (ng/mL) on CD70+ cell lines ADC 786-O Caki-1 c1F6-AF-PAO (C1F6-1010, 2.4 drugs/Ab) 214 316 c1F6-mc-vc-PAB-MMAF (4 drugs/Ab) 5.8 7.4 ATCC Deposits

An ATCC deposit of monoclonal antibody S2C6 was made on May 25, 1999 pursuant to the terms of the Budapest Treaty on the international recognition of the deposit of microorganisms for purposes of patent procedure. This ATCC deposit was given an accession number of PTA-110.

An ATCC deposit of murine monoclonal antibody AC10 was made on Apr. 26, 2005 pursuant to the terms of the Budapest Treaty on the international recognition of the deposit of microorganisms for purposes of patent procedure. This ATCC deposit was given an accession number of PTA-6679.

An ATCC deposit of monoclonal antibody humanized AC10 was made on Aug. 23, 2005 pursuant to the terms of the Budapest Treaty on the international recognition of the deposit of microorganisms for purposes of patent procedure. This ATCC deposit was given an accession number of PTA-6951.

The ATCC is located at 10801 University Boulevard, Manassas, Virgina 20110-2209, USA. Any deposit is provided as a convenience to those of skill in the art and is not an admission that a deposit is required under 35 U.S.C. Section 112. That described herein is not to be limited in scope by the antibody deposited, since the deposited embodiment is intended as a single illustration of certain aspects of the invention and any antibody that is functionally equivalent is within the scope of this invention. The deposit of material herein does not constitute an admission that the written description herein contained is inadequate to enable the practice of any aspect of the invention, including the best mode thereof, nor is it to be construed as limiting the scope of the claims to the specific illustrations that it represents. Indeed, various modifications of the invention in addition to those shown and described herein will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the foregoing description and fall within the scope of the appended claims.

The present invention is not to be limited in scope by the specific embodiments disclosed in the examples which are intended as illustrations of a few aspects of the invention and any embodiments that are functionally equivalent are within the scope of this invention. Indeed, various modifications of the invention in addition to those shown and described herein will become apparent to those skilled in the art and are intended to fall within the scope of the appended claims.

All references cited herein are incorporated by reference in their entirety and for all purposes to the same extent as if each individual publication or patent or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference in its entirety for all purposes. 

What is claimed is:
 1. A compound having the formula:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; wherein: R² is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R³ is selected from the group consisting of C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁴ is selected from the group consisting of C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁵ is H; R⁶ is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁷ is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; each R⁸ is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH,and O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl); and the moiety —NR⁹Z¹ is a bioisostere having Formula A

wherein: R⁹ is selected from the group consisting of H and an amino protecting group; R¹⁰ is selected from the group consisting of C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₁-C₈heteroalkyl, CH₂—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), CH₂-aryl and CH₂—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); and Z² is selected from the group consisting of:


2. The compound of claim 1 having the formula:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 3. The compound of claim 1, wherein R⁹ is H; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 4. The compound of claim 1, wherein R¹⁰ is CH₂-aryl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 5. The compound of claim 1, wherein Formula A is

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 6. A compound having the formula: LU-D or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof; wherein, LU- is a Linker unit; and -D is a drug moiety having the Formula D:

wherein: R² is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R³ is selected from the group consisting of C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁴ is selected from the group consisting of C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁵ is H; R⁶ is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁷ is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; each R⁸ is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, and O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl; and the moiety —NR⁹Z¹ is phenylalanine bioisostere having Formula A

wherein: R⁹ is selected from the group consisting of H and an amino protecting group; R¹⁰ is selected from the group consisting of C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₁-C₈heteroalkyl, CH₂—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), CH₂-aryl and CH₂—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); and Z² is selected from the group consisting of:


7. A compound having Formula Ia′: Ab-(A_(a)-W_(w)-Y_(y)-D)_(p)  Ia′ or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: Ab is an antibody that specifically binds to an antigen, (A_(a)-W_(w)-Y_(y)) is a Linker unit, wherein: A is a Stretcher unit, a is 0 or 1, each W is independently an Amino Acid unit, w is an integer ranging from 0 to 12, Y is a Spacer unit and y is 0, 1 or 2, p ranges from 1 to about 20, and D is a drug moiety having Formula D:

wherein: R² is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R³ is selected from the group consisting of C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁴ is selected from the group consisting of C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁵ is H; R⁶ is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; R⁷ is selected from the group consisting of H and C₁-C₈ alkyl; each R⁸ is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, and O—(C₁-C₈ alkyl); and the moiety —NR⁹Z¹ is a phenylalanine bioisostere having Formula A

wherein: R⁹ is selected from the group consisting of H and an amino protecting group; R¹⁰ is selected from the group consisting of C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₁-C₈heteroalkyl, CH₂—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), CH₂-aryl and CH₂—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); and Z² is selected from the group consisting of:


8. A compound according to claim 7 having the formulae:

wherein Z is the phenylalanine bioisostere moiety

 having Formula A

wherein: R⁹ is selected from the group consisting of H and an amino protecting group; R¹⁰ is selected from the group consisting of C₁-C₈ alkyl, C₁-C₈heteroalkyl, CH₂—(C₃-C₈ carbocycle), CH₂-aryl and CH₂—(C₃-C₈ heterocycle); and Z² is selected from the group consisting of:


9. The compound of claim 6 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the Linker unit comprises: -A_(a)-W_(w)-Y_(y)- wherein -A- is a Stretcher unit, a is 0 or 1, each -W- is independently an Amino Acid unit, w is an integer ranging from 0 to 12, -Y- is a Spacer unit, and y is 0, 1 or
 2. 10. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of the compound of claim 7, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent, carrier or excipient.
 11. The compound of claim 1 having the formula:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. 